ZyXEL Communications WAC6553D-E 802.11 ac Unified Pro Access Point User Manual Book

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	2591179
Application ID	5lWbErTUdtyFvdVXPFDSOg==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	475.86kB (5948249 bits)
Date Submitted	2015-04-21 00:00:00
Date Available	2015-04-21 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-10-07 12:18:25
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-10-07 12:18:25
Document Title	Book.book
Document Creator	FrameMaker 9.0
Document Author:	ZT01651

N W A5 0 0 0 / W AC6 5 0 0 Se r ie s
NWA5121-N / NWA5121-NI / NWA5123-NI / NWA5301-NJ / WAC6502D-E /
WAC6502D-S / WAC6503D-S / WAC6553D-E
802.11 a/b/g/n/ac Unified Access Point
Version 4.20
Edition 1, 04/2015
Quick Start Guide
Use r ’s Gu ide
D e fa u lt Login D e t a ils
LAN IP Address
http://192.168.1.2
User Name
admin
Password
1234
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
This is a User’s Guide for a series of products. Not all products support all firmware features.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the NWA/WAC and access the Web Configurator.
• CLI Reference Guide
The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and CLI
commands to configure the NWA/WAC.
Note: It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the NWA/WAC.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary
information.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................10
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................27
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................38
Dashboard ...............................................................................................................................................39
Monitor ....................................................................................................................................................44
Network ...................................................................................................................................................57
Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................65
User .........................................................................................................................................................77
AP Profile ................................................................................................................................................84
MON Profile ...........................................................................................................................................102
WDS Profile ...........................................................................................................................................106
Certificates ............................................................................................................................................108
System ..................................................................................................................................................125
Log and Report .....................................................................................................................................150
File Manager .........................................................................................................................................162
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................173
LEDs .....................................................................................................................................................175
Reboot ...................................................................................................................................................178
Shutdown ..............................................................................................................................................179
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................180
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................4
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 10
Chapter 1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1.1 Management Mode ..................................................................................................................12
1.1.2 MBSSID ...................................................................................................................................13
1.1.3 Dual-Radio ...............................................................................................................................14
1.1.4 Root AP ...................................................................................................................................15
1.1.5 Repeater ..................................................................................................................................16
1.2 Ways to Manage the NWA/WAC .......................................................................................................17
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA/WAC ........................................................................................17
1.4 Hardware Connections ......................................................................................................................17
1.5 NWA5301-NJ Hardware ....................................................................................................................18
1.5.1 110 Punch-Down Block ............................................................................................................18
1.5.2 Phone Port ...............................................................................................................................19
1.5.3 Console Port ............................................................................................................................19
1.6 LEDs .................................................................................................................................................20
1.6.1 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, WAC6503D-S and WAC6553D-E ...........................................21
1.6.2 NWA5301-NJ ...........................................................................................................................23
1.6.3 NWA5121-N, NWA5121-NI, and NWA5123-NI .......................................................................24
1.7 Starting and Stopping the NWA/WAC ...............................................................................................26
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................27
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27
2.2 Access ...............................................................................................................................................27
2.3 Navigating the Web Configurator ......................................................................................................28
2.3.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................29
2.3.2 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................32
2.3.3 Warning Messages ..................................................................................................................34
2.3.4 Tables and Lists .......................................................................................................................35
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 38
Chapter 3
Dashboard ...........................................................................................................................................39
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................39
3.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................39
3.2 Dashboard .........................................................................................................................................39
3.2.1 CPU Usage ..............................................................................................................................42
3.2.2 Memory Usage ........................................................................................................................43
Chapter 4
Monitor.................................................................................................................................................44
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................44
4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................44
4.2 What You Need to Know ...................................................................................................................44
4.3 Network Status ..................................................................................................................................45
4.3.1 Network Status Graph ............................................................................................................46
4.4 Radio List .........................................................................................................................................47
4.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information ....................................................................................................48
4.5 Station List ........................................................................................................................................50
4.6 WDS Link Info ...................................................................................................................................51
4.7 Detected Device ...............................................................................................................................52
4.8 View Log ...........................................................................................................................................53
Chapter 5
Network................................................................................................................................................57
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57
5.1.1 Management Mode ..................................................................................................................57
5.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................59
5.2 IP Setting ..........................................................................................................................................60
5.3 VLAN .................................................................................................................................................61
5.4 AC (AP Controller) Discovery ............................................................................................................63
Chapter 6
Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................65
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................65
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................65
6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................66
6.2 AP Management ...............................................................................................................................66
6.3 MON Mode ........................................................................................................................................69
6.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List ...................................................................................................71
6.4 Load Balancing .................................................................................................................................71
6.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections ..............................................................................72
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
6.5 DCS ..................................................................................................................................................74
6.6 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................74
Chapter 7
User......................................................................................................................................................77
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................77
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................77
7.1.2 What You Need To Know .........................................................................................................77
7.2 User Summary ..................................................................................................................................78
7.2.1 Add/Edit User ..........................................................................................................................78
7.3 Setting ..............................................................................................................................................80
7.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings ..............................................................................82
Chapter 8
AP Profile.............................................................................................................................................84
8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................84
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................84
8.1.2 What You Need To Know .........................................................................................................84
8.2 Radio .................................................................................................................................................85
8.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile .............................................................................................................86
8.3 SSID .................................................................................................................................................89
8.3.1 SSID List ..................................................................................................................................90
8.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile ..............................................................................................................90
8.4 Security List .......................................................................................................................................92
8.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile ..........................................................................................................93
8.5 MAC Filter List ...................................................................................................................................96
8.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile ......................................................................................................97
8.6 Layer-2 Isolation List .........................................................................................................................98
8.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile ..........................................................................................100
Chapter 9
MON Profile .......................................................................................................................................102
9.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................102
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................102
9.2 MON Profile .....................................................................................................................................102
9.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile ............................................................................................................103
9.3 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................104
Chapter 10
WDS Profile .......................................................................................................................................106
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................106
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................106
10.2 WDS Profile ...................................................................................................................................106
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
10.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile ..........................................................................................................107
Chapter 11
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................108
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................108
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................108
11.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................108
11.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ........................................................................................................... 110
11.2 My Certificates .............................................................................................................................. 111
11.2.1 Add My Certificates .............................................................................................................. 112
11.2.2 Edit My Certificates .............................................................................................................. 116
11.2.3 Import Certificates ............................................................................................................... 118
11.3 Trusted Certificates ....................................................................................................................... 119
11.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates .......................................................................................................121
11.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates ...................................................................................................123
11.4 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................124
Chapter 12
System ...............................................................................................................................................125
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................125
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................125
12.2 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................125
12.3 Date and Time ..............................................................................................................................126
12.3.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List .....................................................................................128
12.3.2 Time Server Synchronization ...............................................................................................128
12.4 WWW Overview ............................................................................................................................129
12.4.1 Service Access Limitations ..................................................................................................130
12.4.2 System Timeout ...................................................................................................................130
12.4.3 HTTPS .................................................................................................................................130
12.4.4 Configuring WWW Service Control .....................................................................................131
12.4.5 HTTPS Example ..................................................................................................................132
12.5 SSH
............................................................................................................................................140
12.5.1 How SSH Works ..................................................................................................................140
12.5.2 SSH Implementation on the NWA/WAC ..............................................................................141
12.5.3 Requirements for Using SSH ...............................................................................................142
12.5.4 Configuring SSH ..................................................................................................................142
12.5.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH ...............................................................................142
12.6 Telnet ............................................................................................................................................144
12.7 FTP ..............................................................................................................................................144
12.8 SNMP ...........................................................................................................................................145
12.8.1 Supported MIBs ...................................................................................................................146
12.8.2 SNMP Traps ........................................................................................................................147
12.8.3 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................147
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
12.8.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile .........................................................................148
Chapter 13
Log and Report .................................................................................................................................150
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................150
13.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter ........................................................................................150
13.2 Email Daily Report ........................................................................................................................150
13.3 Log Setting ...................................................................................................................................152
13.3.1 Log Setting ..........................................................................................................................152
13.3.2 Edit System Log Settings ...................................................................................................154
13.3.3 Edit Remote Server ............................................................................................................156
13.3.4 Active Log Summary ..........................................................................................................158
Chapter 14
File Manager......................................................................................................................................162
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................162
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................162
14.1.2 What you Need to Know ......................................................................................................162
14.2 Configuration File ..........................................................................................................................163
14.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP ..........................................................167
14.3 Firmware Package .......................................................................................................................168
14.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP ............................................................................170
14.4 Shell Script ...................................................................................................................................170
Chapter 15
Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................173
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................173
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................173
15.2 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................173
Chapter 16
LEDs...................................................................................................................................................175
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................175
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................175
16.2 Suppression Screen ....................................................................................................................175
16.3 Locator Screen .............................................................................................................................176
Chapter 17
Reboot ...............................................................................................................................................178
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................178
17.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................178
17.2 Reboot ...........................................................................................................................................178
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 18
Shutdown...........................................................................................................................................179
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179
18.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................179
18.2 Shutdown ......................................................................................................................................179
Chapter 19
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................180
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................180
19.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED ......................................................................................180
19.3 NWA/WAC Access and Login .......................................................................................................181
19.4 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................182
19.5 Wireless Connections ...................................................................................................................184
19.6 Resetting the NWA/WAC ..............................................................................................................187
19.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help ..............................................................................................187
Appendix A Importing Certificates ...................................................................................................188
Appendix B IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................201
Appendix C Customer Support ........................................................................................................210
Appendix D Legal Information .........................................................................................................216
Index ..................................................................................................................................................225
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
10
C HAPT ER
Introduction
1.1 Overview
This User’s Guide covers the following models: NWA5121-N, NWA5121-NI, NWA5123-NI and
NWA5301-NJ, WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, WAC6503D-S and WAC6553D-E. Your NWA/WAC is a
wireless AP (Access Point). It extends the range of your existing wired network without additional
wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users.
Table 1 NWA Series Comparison Table
FEATURES
NWA5121-N
NWA5121-NI
NWA5123-NI
NWA5301-NJ
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE
IEEE
IEEE
IEEE
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
Available Security Modes
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
Number of SSID Profiles
32
32
32
32
Supported Wireless Standards
Supported Frequency Bands
Number of Wireless Radios
802.11a
802.11b
802.11g
802.11n
Monitor Mode & Rogue APs Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Layer-2 Isolation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
External Antennas
Yes
No
No
No
Internal Antenna
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Maximum number of log messages
512 event logs or 1024 debug logs
Table 2 WAC Series Comparison Table
FEATURES
WAC6502D-E
WAC6502D-S
WAC6503D-S
WAC6553D-E
Supported Wireless Standards
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
IEEE 802.11a
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11ac
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Available Security Modes
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
None
WEP
WPA2
WPA2-MIX
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK-MIX
Number of SSID Profiles
32
32
32
32
Supported Frequency Bands
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 2 WAC Series Comparison Table
FEATURES
WAC6502D-E
Number of Wireless Radios
WAC6502D-S
WAC6503D-S
WAC6553D-E
Monitor Mode & Rogue APs Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Layer-2 Isolation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
External Antennas
Yes
No
No
Yes
Internal Antenna
No
Yes
Yes
No
Maximum number of log messages
512 event logs or 1024 debug logs
You can set the NWA/WAC to operate in either standalone AP or managed AP mode. When the
NWA/WAC is in standalone AP mode, it can serve as a normal AP, as an RF monitor to search for
rouge APs to help eliminate network threats (if it supports monitor mode and rogue APs detection),
or even as a root AP or a wireless repeater to establish wireless links with other APs in a WDS
(Wireless Distribution System). A WDS is a wireless connection between two or more APs.
Your NWA/WAC’s business-class reliability, SMB features, and centralized wireless management
make it ideally suited for advanced service delivery in mission-critical networks. It uses Multiple
BSSID and VLAN to provide simultaneous independent virtual APs. Additionally, innovations in
roaming technology and QoS features eliminate voice call disruptions.
The NWA/WAC controls network access with Media Access Control (MAC) address filtering, and
rogue Access Point (AP) detection. It also provides a high level of network traffic security,
supporting IEEE 802.1x, Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data
encryption.
Your NWA/WAC is easy to install, configure and use. The embedded Web-based configurator
enables simple, straightforward management and maintenance. See the Quick Start Guide for how
to make hardware connections.
1.1.1 Management Mode
The NWA/WAC is a unified AP and can work either in standalone AP mode or in managed AP mode.
If the NWA/WAC and a ZyXEL AP controller, such as the NXC2500 or NXC5500, are in the same
subnet, it will be managed by the controller automatically.
An AP controller uses Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP, see RFC 5415)
to discover and configure multiple managed APs.
To set the NWA/WAC to be managed by an AP controller in a different subnet or change between
management modes, use the AC (AP Controller) D iscove r y screen (see Section 5.4 on page 63).
Table 3 NWA/WAC Management Mode Comparison
MANAGEMENT MODE
Standalone AP
Managed AP
DEFAULT IP ADDRESS
UPLOAD FIRMWARE VIA
Dynamic or
Static (192.168.1.2)
Web Configurator or FTP
Dynamic
CAPWAP or FTP
When the NWA/WAC is in standalone AP mode and connects to a DHCP server, it uses the IP
address assigned by the DHCP server. Otherwise, the NWA/WAC uses the default static
management IP address (192.168.1.2). You can use the AC D iscove r y screen to have the NWA/
WAC work as a managed AP.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
12
Chapter 1 Introduction
When the NWA/WAC is in managed AP mode, it acts as a DHCP client and obtains an IP address
from the AP controller. It can be configured ONLY by the AP controller. To change the NWA/WAC
back to standalone AP mode, use the Re se t button to restore the default configuration.
Alternatively, you need to check the AP controller for the NWA/WAC’s IP address and use FTP to
upload the default configuration file at conf/system-default.conf to the NWA/WAC and reboot the
device.
1.1.2 MBSSID
A Basic Service Set (BSS) is the set of devices forming a single wireless network (usually an access
point and one or more wireless clients). The Service Set IDentifier (SSID) is the name of a BSS. In
Multiple BSS (MBSSID) mode, the NWA/WAC provides multiple virtual APs, each forming its own
BSS and using its own individual SSID profile.
You can configure multiple SSID profiles, and have all of them active at any one time.
You can assign different wireless and security settings to each SSID profile. This allows you to
compartmentalize groups of users, set varying access privileges, and prioritize network traffic to
and from certain BSSs.
To the wireless clients in the network, each SSID appears to be a different access point. As in any
wireless network, clients can associate only with the SSIDs for which they have the correct security
settings.
For example, you might want to set up a wireless network in your office where Internet telephony
(VoIP) users have priority. You also want a regular wireless network for standard users, as well as a
‘guest’ wireless network for visitors. In the following figure, VoI P_ SSI D users have QoS priority,
SSI D 0 1 is the wireless network for standard users, and Gu e st _ SSI D is the wireless network for
guest users. In this example, the guest user is forbidden access to the wired Land Area Network
(LAN) behind the AP and can access only the Internet.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 1 Multiple BSSs
1.1.3 Dual-Radio
Some of the NWA/WAC models are equipped with dual wireless radios. This means you can
configure two different wireless networks to operate simultaneously.
Note: A different channel should be configured for each WLAN interface to reduce the
effects of radio interference.
You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz
band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
14
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 2 Dual-Radio Application
1.1.4 Root AP
In Root AP mode, the NWA/WAC (Z) can act as the root AP in a wireless network and also allow
repeaters (X and Y) to extend the range of its wireless network at the same time. In the figure
below, both clients A, B and C can access the wired network through the root AP.
Figure 3 Root AP Application
On the NWA/WAC in Root AP mode, you can have multiple SSIDs active for regular wireless
connections and one SSID for the connection with a repeater (repeater SSID). Wireless clients can
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
15
Chapter 1 Introduction
use either SSID to associate with the NWA/WAC in Root AP mode. A repeater must use the repeater
SSID to connect to the NWA/WAC in Root AP mode.
When the NWA/WAC is in Root AP mode, repeater security between the NWA/WAC and other
repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When
repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See
Section 6.2 on page 66 and Section 10.2 on page 106 for more details.
Unless specified, the term “security settings” refers to the traffic between the wireless clients and
the AP. At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA/WAC only.
1.1.5 Repeater
The NWA/WAC can act as a wireless network repeater to extend a root AP’s wireless network range,
and also establish wireless connections with wireless clients.
Using Repeater mode, your NWA/WAC can extend the range of the WLAN. In the figure below, the
NWA/WAC in Repeater mode (Z) has a wireless connection to the NWA/WAC in Root AP mode (X)
which is connected to a wired network and also has a wireless connection to another NWA/WAC in
Repeater mode (Y) at the same time. Z and Y act as repeaters that forward traffic between
associated wireless clients and the wired LAN. Clients A and B access the AP and the wired network
behind the AP through repeaters Z and Y.
Figure 4 Repeater Application
When the NWA/WAC is in Repeater mode, repeater security between the NWA/WAC and other
repeater is independent of the security between the wireless clients and the AP or repeater. When
repeater security is enabled, both APs and repeaters must use the same pre-shared key. See
Section 6.2 on page 66 and Section 10.2 on page 106 for more details.
Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is
made.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
16
Chapter 1 Introduction
At the time of writing, repeater security is compatible with the NWA/WAC only.
1.2 Ways to Manage the NWA/WAC
You can use the following ways to manage the NWA/WAC.
Web Configurator
The Web Configurator allows easy NWA/WAC setup and management using an Internet browser.
This User’s Guide provides information about the Web Configurator.
Command-Line Interface (CLI)
The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the NWA/WAC. You can access it
using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet). See the Command Reference Guide for
more information.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
This protocol can be used for firmware upgrades and configuration backup and restore.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The NWA/WAC can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this User’s Guide.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the NWA/WAC
Do the following things regularly to make the NWA/WAC more secure and to manage it more
effectively.
• Change the password often. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of
different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the NWA/WAC to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you won’t have to totally re-configure the NWA/WAC; you
can simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Hardware Connections
See your Quick Start Guide for information on making hardware connections.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
17
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.5 NWA5301-NJ Hardware
1.5.1 110 Punch-Down Block
This section shows you how to use a punch-down tool to seat an 8-wire Ethernet cable to the 110
punch-down block. You can connect a PoE switch to the 110 punch-down block to provide power
and Internet access to the NWA through this connection. An 8-pin Ethernet cable has four pairs of
color coded wires.
Cut out one and a half inches of the jacket from the Ethernet cable to expose the wires.
Untwist the wire pairs no more than one inch.
Match each wire to the correct slot according to the color codes for wiring shown below.
N W A Re a r Pa ne l
UPLINK
PORT
PHONE
PORT
PIN#
Table 4 Color Codes for 110 Punch Down Block Wiring
PIN#
WIRE COLOR
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown
Use a punch-down tool to seat the wires down properly into the slot.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
18
Chapter 1 Introduction
Trim any excess wires. Place the dust caps over the terminated wires.
1.5.2 Phone Port
Connect a digital telephone to the RJ-45 PH ON E port at the bottom of the NWA to forward voice
traffic to/from the telephone switchboard that is connected to the RJ-45 PH ON E port on the back of
the NWA. The NWA does not support VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) and the PH ON E port is
NOT for making calls over the regular networking network (PSTN), either.
1.5.3 Console Port
To use the CLI commands to configure the NWA, connect an RJ-45-to-DB-9 cable to the PH ON E
port at the bottom of the NWA.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
19
Chapter 1 Introduction
For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the
following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 115200 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
The following table shows you the wire color codes and pin assignment for the console cable.
Table 5 RJ45-to-DB-9 Console Cable Color Codes
RJ45 PIN#
WIRE COLOR
DB-9 PIN#
Black
Brown
Blue
Purple
1.6 LEDs
The LEDs of your WAC6500 and NWA5301 can be controlled by using the Suppression feature such
that the LEDs stay lit (ON) or OFF after the device is ready.
The WAC6500 also features Locator LED which allows you to see the actual location of the
WAC6500 between several devices in the network.
Following are LED descriptions for the NWA/WAC series models.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
20
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.6.1 WAC6502D-E, WAC6502D-S, WAC6503D-S and WAC6553D-E
The LEDs will stay ON when the WAC is ready. You can change this setting in the M a int e na nce >
LED s > Su ppr e ssion screen.
Figure 5 WAC Series LEDs
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
21
Chapter 1 Introduction
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 6 WAC LEDs
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS
Red
Slow
Blinking
(On for 1s,
Off for 1s)
The WAC is booting up.
Green
On
Red
Off
Green
On
Red
On
Green
Off
Red
Fast
Blinking (on
for 50ms,
Off for
50ms)
Green
Off
Red
Slow
Blinking
(blink for 3
times, Off
for 3s)
Green
Off
Red
Slow
Blinking
(blink for 2
times, Off
for 3s)
Green
Off
Green
On
The WAC AP is managed by a controller.
Blinking
The WAC AP is searching (discovery) for a controller.
Management
WLAN
WLAN
UPLINK
Green
Green
Amber/Green
The WAC is ready for use.
There is system error and the WAC cannot boot up, or the
WAC suffered a system failure.
The WAC is doing firmware upgrade.
The Uplink is disconnected.
The wireless module of the WAC is disabled or failed.
Off
The WAC AP is in standalone mode.
On
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is active.
Blinking
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The 2.4 GHz WLAN is not active.
On
The 5 GHz WLAN is active.
Blinking
The 5 GHz WLAN is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The 5 GHz WLAN is not active.
On
Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000
Mbps).
Blinking
The WAC is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off
The port is not connected.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
22
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 6 WAC LEDs (continued)
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
LAN
Amber/Green
On
Amber - The port is operating as a 100-Mbps connection.
Green - The port is operating as a Gigabit connection (1000
Mbps).
Locator
White
Blinking
The LAN port is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off
The LAN port is not connected.
Blinking
The Locator is activated and will show the actual location of
the NWA/WAC between several devices in the network.
Off
The Locator function is off.
1.6.2 NWA5301-NJ
The LEDs automatically turn off when the NWA5301-NJ is ready. You can press the LED ON button
for one second to turn on the LEDs again. The LEDs will blink and turn off after two minutes.
Figure 6 NWA5301-NJ Side Panel
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
23
Chapter 1 Introduction
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA5301-NJ.
Table 7 NWA5301-NJ LEDs
LABEL
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
PWR/SYS
Amber
Slow Blinking
(On for 1s,
Off for 1s)
The NWA is booting up.
Green
On
Amber
Off
Green
On
Amber
Slow Blinking
(blink for 3
times, Off for
3s)
Green
On
PoE
WLAN
UPLINK
LAN1-3
The NWA is ready for use.
The NWA is discovering an AP controller
Amber
On
Green
Off
Amber
Fast Blinking
(On for 50ms
times, Off for
50ms)
Green
Off
Amber
Slow Blinking
(blink for 3
times, Off for
3s)
Green
Off
Amber
Slow Blinking
(blink for 2
times, Off for
3s)
Green
Off
Green
On
Power is supplied to the yellow PoE Ethernet port (LAN1).
Off
There is no power supply.
On
The WLAN is active.
Blinking
The WLAN is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The WLAN is not active.
On
The port is connected.
Blinking
The NWA/WAC is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off
The port is not connected.
On
The port is connected.
Blinking
The NWA/WAC is sending/receiving data through the port.
Off
The port is not connected.
Green
Green
Green
The NWA failed to boot up or is experiencing system failure.
The NWA is undergoing firmware upgrade.
Uplink is disconnected.
The wireless module of the WAC is disabled or failed.
1.6.3 NWA5121-N, NWA5121-NI, and NWA5123-NI
The following are the LED descriptions for your NWA512x.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
24
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 7 NWA5120 Series LED
Table 8 NWA5120 Series LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Amber
Slow Blinking (On for
1s, Off for 1s)
The NWA is booting up.
Green
Off
Amber
Off
Green
Off
Amber
Off
Green
On
Amber
Off
Green
Blink
Amber
Slow Blinking (blink
for 3 times, Off for
3s)
Green
On
The NWA is ready for use.
The NWA’s wireless interface is activated.
The NWA’s receiving/sending wireless traffic.
Amber
On
Green
Off
Amber
Fast Blinking (On for
50ms, Off for 50ms)
Green
Off
Amber
Slow Blinking (blink
for 3 times, Off for
3s)
Green
Off
The NWA is discovering an AP controller.
The NWA failed to boot up or is experience system failure.
The NWA is undergoing firmware upgrade.
The Uplink is disconnected.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
25
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 8 NWA5120 Series LED (continued)
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Amber
Slow Blinking (blink
for 2 times, Off for
3s)
The wireless LAN is disabled or fails.
Green
Off
1.7 Starting and Stopping the NWA/WAC
Here are some of the ways to start and stop the NWA/WAC.
Always use Maintenance > Shutdown or the shutdown command before
you turn off the NWA/WAC or remove the power. Not doing so can cause
the firmware to become corrupt.
Table 9 Starting and Stopping the NWA/WAC
METHOD
DESCRIPTION
Turning on the power
A cold start occurs when you turn on the power to the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC
powers up, checks the hardware, and starts the system processes.
Rebooting the NWA/
WAC
A warm start (without powering down and powering up again) occurs when you use
the Re boot button in the Re boot screen or when you use the reboot command. The
NWA/WAC writes all cached data to the local storage, stops the system processes,
and then does a warm start.
Using the RESET
button
If you press the RESET button on the back of the NWA/WAC, the NWA/WAC sets the
configuration to its default values and then reboots. See Section 19.6 on page 187 for
more information.
Clicking
M a in t e na n ce >
Sh u t dow n >
Sh u t dow n or using
the shutdown
command
Clicking M a in t e na n ce > Shu t dow n > Sh u t dow n or using the shutdown command
writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Wait for
the device to shut down and then manually turn off or remove the power. It does not
turn off the power.
Disconnecting the
power
Power off occurs when you turn off the power to the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC
simply turns off. It does not stop the system processes or write cached data to local
storage.
The NWA/WAC does not stop or start the system processes when you apply configuration files or
run shell scripts although you may temporarily lose access to network resources.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
26
C HAPT ER
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The NWA/WAC Web Configurator allows easy management using an Internet browser.
In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:
• Use Internet Explorer 7.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 9.0 and later versions, Safari 4.0 and
later versions, or Google Chrome 10.0 and later versions.
• Allow pop-up windows.
• Enable JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Enable Java permissions (enabled by default).
• Enable cookies.
The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels and higher.
2.2 Access
Make sure your NWA/WAC is working in standalone AP mode (see Section 1.1.1 on page 12) and
hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide.
Browse to https://192.168.1.2. The Login screen appears.
Enter the user name (default: “admin”) and password (default: “1234”).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
27
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Click Login . If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Upda t e Adm in I nfo
screen appears. Otherwise, the dashboard appears.
The Upda t e Adm in I n fo screen appears every time you log in using the default user name and
default password. If you change the password for the default user account, this screen does not
appear anymore.
2.3 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the D a shboa r d screen. This
guide uses the WAC6502D-S screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different
models.
Figure 8 The Web Configurator’s Main Screen
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
28
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The Web Configurator’s main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - Title Bar
• B - Navigation Panel
• C - Main Window
2.3.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some useful links that always appear over the screens below, regardless of
how deep into the Web Configurator you navigate.
Figure 9 Title Bar
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 10 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Logout
Click this to log out of the Web Configurator.
Help
Click this to open the help page for the current screen.
About
Click this to display basic information about the NWA/WAC.
Site Map
Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens.
Object
Reference
Click this to open a screen where you can check which configuration items reference an
object.
CLI
Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web
Configurator.
About
Click About to display basic information about the NWA/WAC.
Figure 10 About
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
29
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen.
Table 11 About
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Boot Module
This shows the version number of the software that handles the booting process of the
NWA/WAC.
Current Version
This shows the firmware version of the NWA/WAC.
Released Date
This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released.
OK
Click this to close the screen.
Site Map
Click Sit e M AP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screen’s link to
go to that screen.
Figure 11 Site Map
Object Reference
Click Obj e ct Re fe r e nce to open the Obj e ct Re fe r e nce screen. Select the type of object and the
individual object and click Re fr e sh to show which configuration settings reference the object.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
30
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Figure 12 Object Reference
The fields vary with the type of object. The following table describes labels that can appear in this
screen.
Table 12 Object References
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Object Name
This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click
the object’s name to display the object’s configuration screen in the main window.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
Service
This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a service’s name to
display the service’s configuration screen in the main window.
Priority
If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration item’s position in its list,
otherwise N / A displays.
Name
This field identifies the configuration item that references the object.
Description
If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here.
Refresh
Click this to update the information in this screen.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to close the screen.
CLI Messages
Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. These commands appear in a
popup window, such as the following.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
31
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Figure 13 CLI Messages
Click Cle a r to remove the currently displayed information.
Note: See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands.
2.3.2 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure NWA/WAC features. Click
the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the navigation panel menus
or drag it to resize them. The following sections introduce the NWA/WAC’s navigation panel menus
and their screens.
Figure 14 Navigation Panel
Dashboard
The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, and
interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs.
For details on the Dashboard’s features, see Chapter 3 on page 39.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
32
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Monitor Menu
The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information.
Table 13 Monitor Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK
TAB
Network Status
FUNCTION
Display general LAN interface information and packet statistics.
Wireless
AP Information
Radio List
Display information about the radios of the connected APs.
Station Info
Display information about the connected stations.
WDS Link Info
Display statistics about the NWA/WAC’s WDS (Wireless Disctribution
System) connections.
Log
View Log
Display log entries for the NWA/WAC.
Configuration Menu
Use the configuration menu screens to configure the NWA/WAC’s features.
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Network
IP Setting
Configure the IP address for the NWA/WAC Ethernet interface.
VLAN
Manage the Ethernet interface VLAN settings.
AC Discovery
Configures the NWA/WAC’s AP Controller settings.
AP Management
WLAN Setting
Manage the NWA/WAC’s general wireless settings.
MON Mode
Rogue/Friendly AP
List
Configure how the NWA/WAC monitors for rogue APs.
Wireless
Load Balancing
Configure load balancing for traffic moving to and from wireless
clients.
DCS
Configure dynamic wireless channel selection.
Object
Users
AP Profile
User
Create and manage users.
Setting
Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user
sessions, and rules to force user authentication.
Radio
Create and manage wireless radio settings files that can be
associated with different APs.
SSID
Create and manage wireless SSID, security, MAC filtering, and
layer-2 isolation files that can be associated with different APs.
MON Profile
Create and manage rogue AP monitoring files that can be
associated with different APs.
WDS Profile
Create and manage WDS profiles that can be used to connect to
different APs in WDS.
Certificate
My Certificates
Create and manage th e NWA/WAC’s certificates.
Trusted Certificates
Import and manage certificates from trusted sources.
System
Host Name
Configure the system and domain name for the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
33
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 14 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued)
FOLDER OR LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Date/Time
Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the NWA/WAC.
WWW
Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication.
SSH
Configure SSH server and SSH service settings.
TELNET
Configure telnet server settings for the NWA/WAC.
FTP
Configure FTP server settings.
SNMP
Configure SNMP communities and services.
Log & Report
Email Daily
Report
Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports
to send.
Log Setting
Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers.
Maintenance Menu
Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics,
and reboot or shut down the NWA/WAC.
Table 15 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary
FOLDER OR LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Configuration File
Manage and upload configuration files for the NWA/WAC.
Firmware Package
View the current firmware version and to upload firmware.
Shell Script
Manage and run shell script files for the NWA/WAC.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Collect diagnostic information.
LEDs
Suppression
Enable this feature to keep the LEDs off after the NWA/WAC
starts.
Locator
Enable this feature to see the actual location of the NWA/WAC
between several devices in the network.
File Manager
Reboot
Restart the NWA/WAC.
Shutdown
Turn off the NWA/WAC.
2.3.3 Warning Messages
Warning messages, such as those resulting from misconfiguration, display in a pop up window.
Figure 15 Warning Message
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
34
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
2.3.4 Tables and Lists
The Web Configurator tables and lists are quite flexible and provide several options for how to
display their entries.
2.3.4.1 Manipulating Table Display
Here are some of the ways you can manipulate the Web Configurator tables.
Click a column heading to sort the table’s entries according to that column’s criteria.
Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries.
The options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples
of what you can do:
• Sort in ascending alphabetical order
• Sort in descending (reverse) alphabetical order
• Select which columns to display
• Group entries by field
• Show entries in groups
• Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
35
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Select a column heading cell’s right border and drag to re-size the column.
Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark
displays next to the column’s title when you drag the column to a valid new location.
Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and
control how many entries display at a time.
2.3.4.2 Working with Table Entries
The tables have icons for working with table entries. A sample is shown next. You can often use the
[Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate.
Table 16 Common Table Icons
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
36
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Here are descriptions for the most common table icons.
Table 17 Common Table Icons
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered
list is important (features where the NWA/WAC applies the table’s entries in order like
the firewall for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry
after the selected entry.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in
the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with
changes that you have not yet applied.
Remove
To remove an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Activate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e .
Inactivate
To turn off an entry, select it and click I n a ct iva t e .
Object Reference
Select an entry and click Obj e ct Re fe r e n ce to open a screen that shows which settings
use the entry.
2.3.4.3 Working with Lists
When a list of available entries displays next to a list of selected entries, you can often just doubleclick an entry to move it from one list to the other. In some lists you can also use the [Shift] or
[Ctrl] key to select multiple entries, and then use the arrow button to move them to the other list.
Figure 16 Working with Lists
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
37
P ART II
Technical Reference
38
C HAPT ER
Dashboard
3.1 Overview
Use the D a shboa r d screens to check status information about the NWA/WAC.
3.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The main D a shboa r d screen (Section 3.2 on page 39) displays the NWA/WAC’s general device
information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status. You can also display
other status screens for more information.
3.2 Dashboard
This screen is the first thing you see when you log into the NWA/WAC. It also appears every time
you click the D a sh boa r d icon in the navigation panel. The Dashboard displays general device
information, system status, system resource usage, and interface status in widgets that you can rearrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets.
Figure 17 Dashboard
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
39
Chapter 3 Dashboard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Dashboard
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Widget Settings (A)
Use this link to re-open closed widgets. Widgets that are already open appear grayed
out.
Refresh Time
Setting (B)
Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget.
Refresh Now (C)
Click this to update the widget’s information immediately.
Close Widget (D)
Click this to close the widget. Use W idge t Se t t in g to re-open it.
Device Information
System Name
This field displays the name used to identify the NWA/WAC on any network. Click the
icon to open the screen where you can change it.
Model Name
This field displays the model name of this NWA/WAC.
Serial Number
This field displays the serial number of this NWA/WAC.
MAC Address
Range
This field displays the MAC addresses used by the NWA/WAC. Each physical port or
wireless radio has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet
LAN port, the second MAC address is assigned to the first radio, and so on.
Firmware
Version
This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the NWA/WAC is
currently running. Click the icon to open the screen where you can upload firmware.
System Resources
CPU Usage
This field displays what percentage of the NWA/WAC’s processing capability is currently
being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Sh ow CPU Usa ge icon that
takes you to a chart of the NWA/WAC’s recent CPU usage.
Memory Usage
This field displays what percentage of the NWA/WAC’s RAM is currently being used.
Hover your cursor over this field to display the Sh ow M e m or y Usa ge icon that takes
you to a chart of the NWA/WAC’s recent memory usage.
Flash Usage
This field displays what percentage of the NWA/WAC’s onboard flash memory is
currently being used.
Ethernet Neighbor
Local Port
This field displays the port that is associated with the Ethernet interface to which the
NWA/WAC is connected.
Module Name
This field displays the the module name that is associated with the Ethernet interface to
which the NWA/WAC is connected.
Sys. Name
This field displays the the system name that is associated with the Ethernet interface to
which the NWA/WAC is connected.
FW Version
This displays the firmware version of the system that is associated with the Ethernet
interface to which the NWA/WAC is connected.
Port
(Description)
This field displays the port description that is associated with the Ethernet interface to
which the NWA/WAC is connected.
IP
This displays the IP address that is associated with the Ethernet interface to which the
NWA/WAC is connected.
MAC
This displays the MAC address that is associated with the Ethernet interface to which
the NWA/WAC is connected.
WDS (Wireless Distribution System) Uplink/Downlink Status
MAC Address
This field displays the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC is
connected using WDS.
Radio
This field displays the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC
is connected using WDS.
Channel
This field displays the channel number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/
WAC is connected using WDS.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
40
Chapter 3 Dashboard
Table 18 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSID
This field displays the name of the wireless network to which the NWA/WAC is
connected using WDS.
Security Mode
This field displays which secure encryption methods is being used by the NWA/WAC to
connect to the root AP or repeater using WDS.
Link Status
This field displays the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) and transmission/
reception rate of the wireless connection in WDS.
System Status
System Uptime
This field displays how long the NWA/WAC has been running since it last restarted or
was turned on.
Current Date/
Time
This field displays the current date and time in the NWA/WAC. The format is yyyy-mmdd hh:mm:ss.
Current Login
User
This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of
reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining.
Boot Status
This field displays details about the NWA/WAC’s startup state.
OK - The NWA/WAC started up successfully.
Fir m w a r e u pda t e OK - A firmware update was successful.
Pr oble m a t ic con figu r a t ion a ft e r fir m w a r e u pda t e - The application of the
configuration failed after a firmware upgrade.
Syst e m de fa u lt con figu r a t ion - The NWA/WAC successfully applied the system
default configuration. This occurs when the NWA/WAC starts for the first time or you
intentionally reset the NWA/WAC to the system default settings.
Fa llba ck t o la st good con figu r a t ion - The NWA/WAC was unable to apply the startupconfig.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file.
Fa llba ck t o syst e m de fa u lt con figu r a t ion - The NWA/WAC was unable to apply the
lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file
(system-default.conf).
Boot in g in pr ogr e ss - The NWA/WAC is still applying the system configuration.
Management
Mode
Interface Status
Summary
This shows whether the NWA/WAC is set to work as a stand alone AP.
If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is
displayed in light gray text. Click the D e t a il icon to go to a (more detailed) summary
screen of interface statistics.
Name
This field displays the name of each interface.
Status
This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on
what type of interface it is.
I n a ct ive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.
D ow n - The Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.
Spe e d / D uple x - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays
the port speed and duplex setting (Fu ll or H a lf ).
VID
This field displays the VLAN ID to which the interface belongs.
IP Addr/
Netmask
This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If
the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and
subnet mask via DHCP.
If this interface is a member of an active virtual router, this field displays the IP address
it is currently using. This is either the static IP address of the interface (if it is the
master) or the management IP address (if it is a backup).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
41
Chapter 3 Dashboard
Table 18 Dashboard (continued)
LABEL
IP Assignment
DESCRIPTION
This field displays how the interface gets its IP address.
St a t ic - This interface has a static IP address.
D H CP Clie n t - This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server.
Action
If the interface has a static IP address, this shows n / a .
If the interface has a dynamic IP address, use this field to get or to update the IP
address for the interface. Click Re n e w to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server.
WLAN Interface
Status Summary
This displays status information for the WLAN interface.
Status
This displays whether or not the WLAN interface is activated.
MAC Address
This displays the MAC address of the radio.
Radio
This indicates the radio number on the NWA/WAC.
Band
This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.
This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode.
OP Mode
This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP ( M BSSI D ) , M ON
(monitor), Root AP or Re pe a t e r.
Channel
This indicates the channel number the radio is using.
Station
This displays the number of wireless clients connected to the NWA/WAC.
3.2.1 CPU Usage
Use this screen to look at a chart of the NWA/WAC’s recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click
CPU Usa ge in the dashboard.
Figure 18 Dashboard > CPU Usage
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Dashboard > CPU Usage
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage.
time
The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
42
Chapter 3 Dashboard
Table 19 Dashboard > CPU Usage (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now
Click this to update the information in the window right away.
3.2.2 Memory Usage
Use this screen to look at a chart of the NWA/WAC’s recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this
screen, click M e m or y Usa ge in the dashboard.
Figure 19 Dashboard > Memory Usage
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Dashboard > Memory Usage
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage.
The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred
Refresh Interval
Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now
Click this to update the information in the window right away.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
43
C HAPT ER
Monitor
4.1 Overview
Use the M on it or screens to check status and statistics information.
4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The N e t w or k St a t u s screen (Section 4.3 on page 45) displays general LAN interface information
and packet statistics.
• The N e t w or k St a t u s Gr a ph screen (Section 4.3.1 on page 46) displays a line graph of packet
statistics for the NWA/WAC’s physical LAN port.
• The Ra dio List screen (Section 4.4 on page 47) displays statistics about the wireless radio
transmitters in the NWA/WAC.
• The St a t ion I n fo screen (Section 4.5 on page 50) displays statistics pertaining to the associated
stations.
• The W D S Lin k I n fo screen (Section 4.6 on page 51) displays statistics about the NWA/WAC’s
WDS (Wireless Distribution System) connections.
• The D e t e ct e d D e vice screen (Section 4.7 on page 52) displays information about suspected
rogue APs.
• The Vie w Log screen (Section 4.8 on page 53) displays the NWA/WAC’s current log messages.
You can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the
log in this screen.
4.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through the chapter.
Rogue AP
Rogue APs are wireless access points operating in a network’s coverage area that are not under the
control of the network’s administrators, and can open up holes in a network’s security. See Chapter
9 on page 102 for details.
Friendly AP
Friendly APs are other wireless access points that are detected in your network, as well as any
others that you know are not a threat (those from neighboring networks, for example). See
Chapter 9 on page 102 for details.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
44
Chapter 4 Monitor
4.3 Network Status
Use this screen to look at general Ethernet interface information and packet statistics. To access
this screen, click M onit or > N e t w or k St a t us.
Figure 20 Monitor > Network Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Monitor > Network Status
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Interface
Summary
Use the I n t e r fa ce Sum m a r y section for IPv4 network settings. Use the I Pv6 I nt e r fa ce
Su m m a r y section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your NWA/WAC to an IPv6
network. Both sections have similar fields as described below.
IPv6 Interface
Summary
Name
This field displays the name of the interface.
Status
This field displays the current status of the interface:
I n a ct ive - The Ethernet interface is disabled.
D ow n - The Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected.
Spe e d / D u ple x - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the
port speed and duplex setting (Fu ll or H a lf ).
VID
This field displays the VLAN ID to which the interface belongs.
IP Addr/Netmask
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address (and subnet mask) of the interface. If the IP
address is 0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network) or :: (in the IPv6 network), the interface does not
have an IP address yet.
IP Assignment
This field displays how the interface gets its IPv4 address.
St a t ic - This interface has a static IPv4 address.
D H CP Clie nt - This interface gets its IPv4 address from a DHCP server.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
45
Chapter 4 Monitor
Table 21 Monitor > Network Status (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Action
Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Re n e w to send a
new DHCP request to a DHCP server. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get
or to update its IP address, this field displays n / a .
Port Statistics
Table
Poll Interval
Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Se t I n t e r va l.
Set Interval
Click this to set the Poll I n t e r va l the screen uses.
Stop
Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting
the Poll I n t e r va l and clicking Se t I n t e r va l.
Switch to
Graphic View
Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph.
Status
This field displays the current status of the physical port.
D ow n - The physical port is not connected.
Spe e d / D u ple x - The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and
duplex setting (Fu ll or H a lf ).
TxPkts
This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the NWA/WAC on the physical
port since it was last connected.
RxPkts
This field displays the number of packets received by the NWA/WAC on the physical port
since it was last connected.
Collisions
This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected.
Tx
This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the
one-second interval before the screen updated.
Rx
This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the
one-second interval before the screen updated.
Up Time
This field displays how long the physical port has been connected.
System Up Time
This field displays how long the NWA/WAC has been running since it last restarted or was
turned on.
4.3.1 Network Status Graph
Use the port statistics graph to look at a line graph of packet statistics for the NWA/WAC’s physical
Ethernet port. To view, in the N e t w or k St a t u s screen click the Sw it ch t o Gr a phic Vie w button.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
46
Chapter 4 Monitor
Figure 21 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Monitor > Network Status > Switch to Graphic View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated.
Refresh Now
Click this to update the information in the window right away.
Switch to Grid
View
Click this to display the port statistics as a table.
bps
The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception.
time
The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred
TX
This line represents traffic transmitted from the NWA/WAC on the physical port since it was
last connected.
RX
This line represents the traffic received by the NWA/WAC on the physical port since it was
last connected.
Last Update
This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
4.4 Radio List
Use this screen to view statistics for the NWA/WAC’s wireless radio transmitters. To access this
screen, click M on it or > W ir e le ss > AP I nfor m a t ion > Ra dio List .
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 Monitor
Figure 22 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
More
Information
Click this to view additional information about the selected radio’s wireless traffic and
station count. Information spans a 24 hour period.
Status
This displays whether or not the radio is enabled.
Loading
This indicates the AP’s load balance status (Un de r Loa d or Ove r Loa d) when load
balancing is enabled on the NWA/WAC. Otherwise, it shows - when load balancing is
disabled or the radio is in monitor mode.
MAC Address
This displays the MAC address of the radio.
Radio
This indicates the radio number on the NWA/WAC to which it belongs.
OP Mode
This indicates the radio’s operating mode. Operating modes are AP ( M BSSI D ) ,
M ON I TOR, Root AP or Re pe a t e r
AP/WDS Profile
This indicates the AP profile name and WDS profile name to which the radio belongs.
Frequency Band
This indicates the wireless frequency band currently being used by the radio.
This shows - when the radio is in monitor mode.
Channel ID
This indicates the radio’s channel ID.
Station
This displays the number of wireless clients connected to this radio on the NWA/WAC.
Rx PKT
This displays the total number of packets received by the radio.
Tx PKT
This displays the total number of packets transmitted by the radio.
Rx FCS Error
Count
This indicates the number of received packet errors accrued by the radio.
Tx Retry Count
This indicates the number of times the radio has attempted to re-transmit packets.
4.4.1 AP Mode Radio Information
This screen allows you to view a selected radio’s SSID details, wireless traffic statistics and station
count for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select a radio and click the M or e
I nfor m a t ion button in the Ra dio List screen.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
48
Chapter 4 Monitor
Figure 23 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSID Detail
This list shows information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the
specified radio over the preceding 24 hours.
This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this
list.
SSID Name
This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum.
BSSID
This displays a BSSID associated with this radio. The BSSID is tied to the SSID.
Security
Mode
This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating.
VLAN
This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID.
Traffic Statistics
This graph displays the overall traffic information of the radio over the preceding 24 hours.
This y-axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio in megabytes per
second.
This x-axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio.
Station Count
This graph displays the connected station information of the radio over the preceding 24
hours
The y-axis represents the number of connected stations.
The x-axis shows the time period over which a station was connected.
Last Update
This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated.
OK
Click this to close this window.
Cancel
Click this to close this window.
4.5 Station List
Use this screen to view statistics pertaining to the associated stations (or “wireless clients”). Click
M onit or > W ir e le ss > St a t ion I n fo to access this screen.
Figure 24 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
50
Chapter 4 Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Monitor > Wireless > Station Info
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the station’s index number in this list.
MAC Address
This is the station’s MAC address.
Radio
This is the radio number on the NWA/WAC to which the station is connected.
SSID Name
This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single
AP can have multiple SSIDs or networks.
Security Mode
This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the station to connect to
the network.
Signal Strength
This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the station’s wireless connection.
Tx Rate
This is the maximum transmission rate of the station.
Rx Rate
This is the maximum reception rate of the station.
Association Time
This displays the time the station first associated with the NWA/WAC’s wireless network.
Refresh
Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
4.6 WDS Link Info
Use this screen to view the WDS traffic statistics between the NWA/WAC and a root AP or repeaters.
Click M onit or > W ir e le ss > W D S Link I nfo to access this screen.
Figure 25 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
51
Chapter 4 Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Monitor > Wireless > WDS Link Info
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WDS Uplink Info
Uplin k refers to the WDS link from the repeaters to the root AP.
WDS Downlink
Info
D ow n lin k refers to the WDS link from the root AP to the repeaters.
When the NWA/WAC is in root AP mode and connected to a repeater, only the downlink
information is displayed.
When the NWA/WAC is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP directly or via another
repeater, the uplink information is displayed.
When the NWA/WAC is in repeater mode and connected to a root AP and other repeater(s),
both the uplink and downlink information would be displayed.
This is the index number of the root AP or repeater in this list.
MAC Address
This is the MAC address of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC is connected
using WDS.
Radio
This is the radio number on the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC is connected
using WDS.
SSID Name
This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the NWA/WAC is connected using
WDS.
Security Mode
This indicates which secure encryption methods is being used by the NWA/WAC to connect
to the root AP or repeater using WDS.
Signal Strength
This is the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) of the wireless connection in WDS.
Tx Rate
This is the maximum transmission rate of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC is
connected using WDS.
Rx Rate
This is the maximum reception rate of the root AP or repeater to which the NWA/WAC is
connected using WDS.
Association Time
This displays the time the NWA/WAC first associated with the wireless network using WDS.
Refresh
Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
4.7 Detected Device
Use this screen to view information about suspected rogue APs. Click M on it or > W ir e le ss >
D e t e ct e d D e vice to access this screen. Not all NWA/WACs support monitor mode and rogue APs
detection.
Note: The radio or at least one of the NWA/WAC’s radio must be set to monitor mode (in
the W ir e le ss > AP M a n a ge m e n t screen) in order to detect other wireless devices
in its vicinity.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
52
Chapter 4 Monitor
Figure 26 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mark as Rogue
AP
Click this button to mark the selected AP as a rogue AP. A rogue AP can be contained in the
Configu r a t ion > W ir e le ss > M ON M ode screen (Section 6.3 on page 69).
Mark as Friendly
AP
Click this button to mark the selected AP as a friendly AP. For more on managing friendly
APs, see the Con figu r a t ion > W ir e le ss > M ON M ode screen (Section 6.3 on page 69).
This is the detected device’s index number in this list.
Status
This indicates the detected device’s status.
Device
This indicates the type of device detected.
Role
This indicates the detected device’s role (such as friendly or rogue).
MAC Address
This indicates the detected device’s MAC address.
SSID Name
This indicates the detected device’s SSID.
Channel ID
This indicates the detected device’s channel ID.
802.11 Mode
This indicates the 802.11 mode (a/b/g/n) transmitted by the detected device.
Security
This indicates the encryption method (if any) used by the detected device.
Description
This displays the detected device’s description. For more on managing friendly and rogue
APs, see the Con figu r a t ion > W ir e le ss > M ON M ode screen (Section 6.3 on page 69).
Last Seen
This indicates the last time the device was detected by the NWA/WAC.
Refresh
Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page.
4.8 View Log
Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging
messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can
select a specific category of log messages (for example, user). You can also look at the debugging
log by selecting D e bug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
53
Chapter 4 Monitor
To access this screen, click M onit or > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen.
Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages
automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log
message first.
Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in
black. Click a column’s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column’s criteria. Click the
heading cell again to reverse the sort order.
Figure 27 Monitor > Log > View Log
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
54
Chapter 4 Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Monitor > Log > View Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Show Filter /
Hide Filter
Click this button to show or hide the filter settings.
If the filter settings are hidden, the D ispla y, Em a il Log N ow , Re fr e sh , and Cle a r Log
fields are available.
If the filter settings are shown, the D ispla y, Pr ior it y, Sour ce Addr e ss, D e st in a t ion
Addr e ss, Se r vice , Ke yw or d, and Se a r ch fields are available.
Display
Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one
time, or you can view the D e bu g Log.
Priority
This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The
log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are: a n y, e m e r g, a le r t ,
cr it , e r r or, w a r n , n ot ice , and in fo, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is
read-only if the Ca t e gor y is D e bu g Log.
Source Address
This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet
that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter.
Destination
Address
This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the
incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter.
Source Interface
This displays when you show the filter. Select the source interface of the packet that
generated the log message.
Destination
Interface
This displays when you show the filter. Select the destination interface of the packet that
generated the log message.
Protocol
This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you
would like to see.
Keyword
This displays when you show the filter. Type a keyword to look for in the M e ssa ge ,
Sou r ce , D e st in a t ion and N ot e fields. If a match is found in any field, the log message is
displayed. You can use up to 63 alphanumeric characters and the underscore, as well as
punctuation marks ()’ ,:;?! +-*/= #$% @ ; the period, double quotes, and brackets are
not allowed.
Search
This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current
filter settings.
Email Log Now
Click this button to send log messages to the Act ive e-mail addresses specified in the
Se n d Log To field on the Con figu r a t ion > Log & Re por t > Log Se t t in gs screen.
Refresh
Click this to update the list of logs.
Clear Log
Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the
screen.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message.
Time
This field displays the time the log message was recorded.
Priority
This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the
Pr ior it y field above.
Category
This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the
D ispla y and (other) Ca t e gor y fields.
Message
This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text “[count=x]”, where
x is a number, appears at the end of the M e ssa ge field if log consolidation is turned on and
multiple entries were aggregated to generate into this one.
Source
This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated
the log message.
Destination
This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that
generated the log message.
Note
This field displays any additional information about the log message.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
55
Chapter 4 Monitor
The Web Configurator saves the filter settings if you leave the Vie w Log screen and return to it
later.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
56
C HAPT ER
Network
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes how you can configure the management IP address and VLAN settings of
your NWA/WAC.
The Internet Protocol (IP) address identifies a device on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across
the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Figure 28 IP Setup
The figure above illustrates one possible setup of your NWA/WAC. The gateway IP address is
192.168.1.1 and the managed IP address of the NWA/WAC is 192.168.1.2 (default), but if the
NWA/WAC is assigned an IP address by a DHCP server, the default (192.168.1.2) will not be used.
The gateway and the NWA/WAC must belong in the same IP subnet to be able to communicate with
each other.
5.1.1 Management Mode
This discusses using the NWA/WAC in management mode, which determines whether the NWA/
WAC is used in its standalone mode, or as part of a Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access
Points (CAPWAP) network.
About CAPWAP
The NWA/WAC supports CAPWAP. This is ZyXEL’s implementation of the CAPWAP protocol (RFC
5415).
The CAPWAP dataflow is protected by Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS).
The following figure illustrates a CAPWAP wireless network. You (U) configure the AP controller (C),
which then automatically updates the configurations of the managed APs (M 1 ~ M 4 ).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
57
Chapter 5 Network
Figure 29 CAPWAP Network Example
Note: The NWA/WAC can be a standalone AP (default), or a CAPWAP managed AP.
CAPWAP Discovery and Management
The link between CAPWAP-enabled access points proceeds as follows:
An AP in managed AP mode joins a wired network (receives a dynamic IP address).
The AP sends out a discovery request, looking for a CAPWAP AP controller.
If there is an AP controller on the network, it receives the discovery request. If the AP controller is
in M a n u a l mode it adds the details of the AP to its Un m a na ge d Acce ss Poin t s list, and you
decide which available APs to manage. If the AP is in Alw a ys Acce pt mode, it automatically adds
the AP to its M a na ge d Acce ss Point s list and provides the managed AP with default configuration
information, as well as securely transmitting the DTLS pre-shared key. The managed AP is ready for
association with wireless clients.
Managed AP Finds the Controller
A managed NWA/WAC can find the controller in one of the following ways:
• Manually specify the controller’s IP address in the Web Configurator’s AC (AP Controller)
D iscove r y screen.
• Get the controller’s IP address from a DHCP server with the controller’s IP address configured as
option 138.
• Get the controller’s IP address from a DNS server SRV (Service) record.
• Broadcasting to discover the controller within the broadcast domain.
Note: The AP controller needs to have a static IP address. If it is a DHCP client, set the
DHCP server to reserve an IP address for the AP controller.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
58
Chapter 5 Network
CAPWAP and IP Subnets
By default, CAPWAP works only between devices with IP addresses in the same subnet.
However, you can configure CAPWAP to operate between devices with IP addresses in different
subnets by doing the following.
• Activate DHCP. Your network’s DHCP server must support option 138 defined in RFC 5415.
• Configure DHCP option 138 with the IP address of the CAPWAP AP controller on your network.
DHCP Option 138 allows the CAPWAP management request (from the AP in managed AP mode) to
reach the AP controller in a different subnet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 30 CAPWAP and DHCP Option 138
Notes on CAPWAP
This section lists some additional features of ZyXEL’s implementation of the CAPWAP protocol.
• When the AP controller uses its internal Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)
server, managed APs also use the AP controller’s authentication server to authenticate wireless
clients.
• If a managed AP’s link to the AP controller is broken, the managed AP continues to use the
wireless settings with which it was last provided.
5.1.2 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The I P Se t t in g screen (Section 5.2 on page 60) configures the NWA/WAC’s LAN IP address.
• The VLAN screen (Section 5.3 on page 61) configures the NWA/WAC’s VLAN settings.
• The AC (AP Controller) D iscove r y screen (Section 5.3 on page 61) configures the NWA/WAC’s
AP Controller settings.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
59
Chapter 5 Network
5.2 IP Setting
Use this screen to configure the IP address for your NWA/WAC. To access this screen, click
Configur a t ion > N e t w or k > I P Se t t ing.
Figure 31 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (Retake screenshot)
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 29 Configuration > Network > IP Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Assignment
Get
Automatically
Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually.
IP Address
Enter the IP address for this interface.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask
indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network.
Gateway
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The NWA/WAC sends packets to the gateway when
it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on
the same network as the interface.
DNS Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
60
Chapter 5 Network
Table 29 Configuration > Network > IP Setting (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Address
Assignment
Enable Stateless
Address Autoconfiguration
(SLAAC)
Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC
will generate an IPv6 address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the
network.
Link-Local
Address
This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the NWA/WAC
generates itself for the LAN interface.
IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length
Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for the LAN interface if you want to use a
static IP address. This field is optional.
The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all
computers in the network, that is, the network address.
Gateway
Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal
notation.
Metric
Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on the LAN interface. The NWA/WAC decides
which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the
priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the NWA/WAC uses the one
that was configured first.
DHCPv6 Client
Select this option to set the NWA/WAC to act as a DHCPv6 client.
DUID
This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the NWA/WAC, which is unique
and used for identification purposes when the NWA/WAC is exchanging DHCPv6
messages with others. See Appendix B on page 201 for more information.
Request Address
DHCPv6 Request
Options
Select this option to determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6
server.
DNS Server
Select this option to obtain the IP address of the DNS server.
NTP Server
Select this option to obtain the IP address of the NTP server.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
5.3 VLAN
This section discusses how to configure the NWA/WAC’s VLAN settings.
Figure 32 Management VLAN Setup
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
61
Chapter 5 Network
In the figure above, to access and manage the NWA/WAC from computer A, the NWA/WAC and
switch B’s ports to which computer A and the NWA/WAC are connected should be in the same
VLAN.
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
Use this screen to configure the VLAN settings for your NWA/WAC. To access this screen, click
Con figu r a t ion > N e t w or k > VLAN .
Figure 33 Configuration > Network > VLAN
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 30 Configuration > Network > VLAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
VLAN Settings
Management
VLAN ID
Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA/WAC.
As Native VLAN
Select this option to treat this VLAN ID as a VLAN created on the NWA/WAC and not one
assigned to it from outside the network.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
62
Chapter 5 Network
Table 30 Configuration > Network > VLAN (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
LAN Setting
Port Setting
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in
the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with
changes that you have not yet applied.
Activate/
Inactivate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e . To turn off an entry, select it and click
I n a ct iva t e .
This is the index number of the port.
Status
This field displays the current status of each port.
I n a ct ive - The port is disabled.
Act ive - The port is enabled.
Port
This field displays the name of the port.
PVID
This field displays the port number of the VLAN ID.
VLAN Configuration
Add
Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entry’s position in the numbered
list is important (features where the NWA/WAC applies the table’s entries in order like
the SSID for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry
after the selected entry.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in
the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with
changes that you have not yet applied.
Remove
To remove an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Activate/
Inactivate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e . To turn off an entry, select it and click
I n a ct iva t e .
This is the index number of the VLAN ID
Status
This field displays the current status of each VLAN.
I n a ct ive - The VLAN is disabled.
Act ive - The VLAN is disabled.
Name
This field displays the name of each VLAN.
VID
This field displays the VLAN ID.
Member
This field displays the VLAN membership to which the port belongs.
Apply
Click Apply to save the information entered in this screen.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
5.4 AC (AP Controller) Discovery
This section discusses how to configure the NWA/WAC’s AC Discovery (AP Controller) settings. You
can have the NWA/WAC managed by an AP controller on your network. When you do this, the NWA/
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
63
Chapter 5 Network
WAC can be configured ONLY by the AP controller. See Section 5.1.1 on page 57 for more
information on management mode and AP Controller.
If you want to return the NWA/WAC to standalone AP mode, you can do one of the two following
options:
• Press the Reset button.
• Check the AP controller for the NWA/WAC’s IP address and use FTP to upload the default
configuration file to the NWA/WAC. You can get the configuration file at conf/system-default.conf.
You must reboot the device after uploading the configuration file.
To access the Controller Discover screen, click Con figu r a t ion > N e t w or k > AC D iscove r y.
Figure 34 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 31 Configuration > Network > AC Discovery
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Discovery Setting
Auto
Select this option to use DHCP option 138/DNS SRV record/Broadcast to get the
AP controller’s IP address.
Manual
Select this option and enter the IP address of the AP controller manually. This is
necessary when the AP Controller is not in the same subnet and you want it to
manage the NWA/WAC.
Primary and Secondary
Static AC IP
Specify the primary and secondary IP address of the AP controller to which the
NWA/WAC connects.
Disable
Select this to manage the NWA/WAC using its own web configurator, neither
managing nor managed by other devices. Please note if an AP Controller is in the
same subnet, you will need to click D isa ble if you do not want the NWA/WAC to
be managed.
Apply
Click Apply to save the information entered in this screen.
If you change the mode in this screen, the NWA/WAC restarts. Wait a short while
before you attempt to log in again. If you changed the mode to M a n a ge d AP,
the AP controller uploads the firmware package for managed AP mode to the
NWA/WAC and you cannot log in as the web configurator is disabled; you must
manage the NWA/WAC through the AP controller on your network.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
64
C HAPT ER
Wireless
6.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NWA/WAC.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 35 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are
called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices
(such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NWA/WAC is the AP.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The AP M a n a ge m e n t screen (Section 6.2 on page 66) manages the NWA/WAC’s general
wireless settings.
• The M ON M ode screen (Section 6.3 on page 69) allows you to assign APs either to the rogue AP
list or the friendly AP list.
• The Loa d Ba la ncing screen (Section 6.4 on page 71) configures network traffic load balancing
between the APs and the NWA/WAC.
• The D CS screen (Section 6.5 on page 74) configures dynamic radio channel selection.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
65
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Station / Wireless Client
A station or wireless client is any wireless-capable device that can connect to an AP using a wireless
signal.
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS)
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is a feature that allows an AP to automatically select the radio
channel upon which it broadcasts by scanning the area around it and determining what channels
are currently being used by other devices.
Load Balancing (Wireless)
Wireless load balancing is the process where you limit the number of connections allowed on an
wireless access point (AP) or you limit the amount of wireless traffic transmitted and received on it
so the AP does not become overloaded.
6.2 AP Management
Use this screen to manage the NWA/WAC’s general wireless settings. Click Con figu r a t ion >
W ir e le ss > AP M a na ge m e nt to access this screen.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
66
Chapter 6 Wireless
Figure 36 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 32 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Radio 1 Setting
Radio 1 Activate
Select the check box to enable the NWA/WAC’s first (default) radio.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
67
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 32 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Radio 1 OP Mode
Select the operating mode for radio 1.
AP M ode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their
data traffic through to the NWA/WAC to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an
upstream gateway for managing).
M ON M ode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes
their information on to the NWA/WAC where it can be determined if those APs are
friendly or rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from
wireless clients.
Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with
other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS (Wireless Distribution System) to extend
its wireless network.
Re pe a t e r means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either
root AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.
Radio 1 Profile
Select the radio profile the radio uses.
Note: You can only apply a 2.4G AP radio profile to radio 1. Otherwise, the first radio will
not be working.
Radio 1 WDS Profile
This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Re pe a t e r mode.
Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Uplink Selection
Mode
This field is available only when the radio is in Re pe a t e r mode.
Select AUTO to have the NWA/WAC automatically use the settings in the applied WDS
profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Select M a n u a l to have the NWA/WAC connect to the root AP or repeater with the MAC
address specified in the Ra dio 1 Uplin k M AC Addr e ss field.
Output Power
Enter the output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the NWA/WAC in this field. If there is
a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA/WAC to reduce
interference with other APs.
Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA/WAC’s effective broadcast
radius.
MBSSID Settings
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in
the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with
changes that you have not yet applied.
This field shows the index number of the SSID
SSID Profile
This field displays the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.
Radio 2 Setting
Radio 2 Activate
This displays if the NWA/WAC has a second radio.
Select the check box to enable the NWA/WAC’s second radio.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
68
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 32 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Radio 2 OP Mode
This displays if the NWA/WAC has a second radio. Select the operating mode for radio
2.
AP M ode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their
data traffic through to the NWA/WAC to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an
upstream gateway for managing).
M ON M ode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes
their information on to the NWA/WAC where it can be determined if those APs are
friendly or rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from
wireless clients.
Root AP means the radio acts as an AP and also supports the wireless connections with
other APs (in repeater mode) to form a WDS to extend its wireless network.
Re pe a t e r means the radio can establish a wireless connection with other APs (in either
root AP or repeater mode) to form a WDS.
Radio 2 Profile
This displays if the NWA/WAC has a second radio. Select the radio profile the radio uses.
Note: You can only apply a 5G AP radio profile to radio 2. Otherwise, the second radio will
not be working.
Radio 2 WDS Profile
This field is available only when the radio is in Root AP or Re pe a t e r mode.
Select the WDS profile the radio uses to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Uplink Selection
Mode
This field is available only when the radio is in Re pe a t e r mode.
Select AUTO to have the NWA/WAC automatically use the settings in the applied WDS
profile to connect to a root AP or repeater.
Select M a n u a l to have the NWA/WAC connect to the root AP or repeater with tbe MAC
address specified in the Ra dio 2 Uplin k M AC Addr e ss field.
Output Power
Enter the output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the NWA/WAC in this field. If there is
a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the NWA/WAC to reduce
interference with other APs.
Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the NWA/WAC’s effective broadcast
radius.
MBSSID Settings
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in
the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with
changes that you have not yet applied.
This field shows the index number of the SSID
SSID Profile
This field shows the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
6.3 MON Mode
Use this screen to assign APs either to the rogue AP list or the friendly AP list. A rogue AP is a
wireless access point operating in a network’s coverage area that is not under the control of the
network administrator, and which can potentially open up holes in a network’s security.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
69
Chapter 6 Wireless
Click Configur a t ion > W ir e le ss > M ON M ode to access this screen.
Figure 37 Configuration > Wireless > MON Mode
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 33 Configuration > Wireless > MON Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rogue/Friendly AP List
Add
Click this button to add an AP to the list and assign it either friendly or rogue
status.
Edit
Select an AP in the list to edit and reassign its status.
Remove
Select an AP in the list to remove.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface.
Role
This field indicates whether the selected AP is a r ogu e - a p or a fr ie n dly- a p. To
change the AP’s role, click the Edit button.
MAC Address
This field indicates the AP’s radio MAC address.
Description
This field displays the AP’s description. You can modify this by clicking the Edit
button.
Importing/Exporting
File Path / Browse /
Importing
These controls allow you to export the current list of rogue and friendly APs or
import existing lists.
Enter the file name and path of the list you want to import or click the Br ow se
button to locate it. Once the File Pa t h field has been populated, click I m por t in g
to bring the list into the NWA/WAC.
You need to wait a while for the importing process to finish.
Exporting
Click this button to export the current list of either rogue APs or friendly APS.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
70
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.3.1 Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly List
Click Add or select an AP and click the Edit button in the Configu r a t ion > W ir e le ss > M ON
M ode table to display this screen.
Figure 38 Configuration > Wireless > MON Mode > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 34 Configuration > Wireless > MON Mode > Add/Edit Rogue/Friendly AP List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC
Enter the MAC address of the AP you want to add to the list. A MAC address is a unique
hardware identifier in the following hexadecimal format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx where xx is
a hexadecimal number separated by colons.
Description
Enter up to 60 characters for the AP’s description. Spaces and underscores are allowed.
Role
Select either Rogu e AP or Fr ie n dly AP for the AP’s role.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to close the window with changes unsaved.
6.4 Load Balancing
Use this screen to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the APs on your
network. Click Configur a t ion > W ir e le ss > Loa d Ba la ncing to access this screen.
Figure 39 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 Wireless
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 35 Configuration > Wireless > Load Balancing
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Load
Balancing
Select this to enable load balancing on the NWA/WAC.
Mode
Select a mode by which load balancing is carried out.
Use this section to configure wireless network traffic load balancing between the
managd APs in this group.
Select By St a t ion N u m be r to balance network traffic based on the number of specified
stations connected to the NWA/WAC.
Select By Tr a ffic Le ve l to balance network traffic based on the volume generated by
the stations connected to the NWA/WAC.
Select By Sm a r t Cla ssr oom to balance network traffic based on the number of
specified stations connected to the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC ignores association
request and authentication request packets from any new station when the maximum
number of stations is reached.
If you select By St a t ion N um be r or By Tr a ffic Le ve l, once the threshold is crossed
(either the maximum station numbers or with network traffic), the NWA/WAC delays
association request and authentication request packets from any new station that
attempts to make a connection. This allows the station to automatically attempt to
connect to another, less burdened AP if one is available.
Max Station
Number
Enter the threshold number of stations at which the NWA/WAC begins load balancing its
connections.
Traffic Level
Select the threshold traffic level at which the NWA/WAC begins load balancing its
connections (Low , M e diu m , H igh ).
Disassociate
station when
overloaded
This function is enabled by default and the disassociation priority is always Sign a l
St r e n gt h when you set M ode to By Sm a r t Cla ssr oom .
Select this option to disassociate wireless clients connected to the AP when it becomes
overloaded. If you do not enable this option, then the AP simply delays the connection
until it can afford the bandwidth it requires, or it transfers the connection to another AP
within its broadcast radius.
The disassociation priority is determined automatically by the NWA/WAC and is as
follows:
•
•
I dle Tim e ou t - Devices that have been idle the longest will be kicked first. If none
of the connected devices are idle, then the priority shifts to Sign a l St r e ngt h .
Sign a l St r e n gt h - Devices with the weakest signal strength will be kicked first.
Note: If you enable this function, you should ensure that there are multiple APs within the
broadcast radius that can accept any rejected or kicked wireless clients; otherwise,
a wireless client attempting to connect to an overloaded AP will be disassociated
permanently and never be allowed to connect.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
6.4.1 Disassociating and Delaying Connections
When your AP becomes overloaded, there are two basic responses it can take. The first one is to
“delay” a client connection. This means that the AP withholds the connection until the data transfer
throughput is lowered or the client connection is picked up by another AP. If the client is picked up
by another AP then the original AP cannot resume the connection.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
72
Chapter 6 Wireless
For example, here the AP has a balanced bandwidth allotment of 6 Mbps. If laptop R connects and
it pushes the AP over its allotment, say to 7 Mbps, then the AP delays the red laptop’s connection
until it can afford the bandwidth or the laptop is picked up by a different AP with bandwidth to
spare.
Figure 40 Delaying a Connection
The second response your AP can take is to kick the connections that are pushing it over its
balanced bandwidth allotment.
Figure 41 Kicking a Connection
Connections are kicked based on either idle t im e out or sign a l st r e n gt h . The NWA/WAC first looks
to see which devices have been idle the longest, then starts kicking them in order of highest idle
time. If no connections are idle, the next criteria the NWA/WAC analyzes is signal strength. Devices
with the weakest signal strength are kicked first.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
73
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.5 DCS
Use this screen to configure dynamic radio channel selection. Click Configur a t ion > W ir e le ss >
D CS to access this screen.
Figure 42 Configuration > Wireless > DCS
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 36 Configuration > Wireless > DCS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select Now
Click this to have the NWA/WAC scan for and select an available channel immediately.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
6.6 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this
chapter.
Dynamic Channel Selection
When numerous APs broadcast within a given area, they introduce the possibility of heightened
radio interference, especially if some or all of them are broadcasting on the same radio channel. If
the interference becomes too great, then the network administrator must open his AP configuration
options and manually change the channel to one that no other AP is using (or at least a channel
that has a lower level of interference) in order to give the connected stations a minimum degree of
interference. Dynamic channel selection frees the network administrator from this task by letting
the AP do it automatically. The AP can scan the area around it looking for the channel with the least
amount of interference.
In the 2.4 GHz spectrum, each channel from 1 to 13 is broken up into discrete 22 MHz segments
that are spaced 5 MHz apart. Channel 1 is centered on 2.412 GHz while channel 13 is centered on
2.472 GHz.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
74
Chapter 6 Wireless
Figure 43 An Example Three-Channel Deployment
Three channels are situated in such a way as to create almost no interference with one another if
used exclusively: 1, 6 and 11. When an AP broadcasts on any of these three channels, it should not
interfere with neighboring APs as long as they are also limited to same trio.
Figure 44 An Example Four-Channel Deployment
However, some regions require the use of other channels and often use a safety scheme with the
following four channels: 1, 4, 7 and 11. While they are situated sufficiently close to both each other
and the three so-called “safe” channels (1,6 and 11) that interference becomes inevitable, the
severity of it is dependent upon other factors: proximity to the affected AP, signal strength, activity,
and so on.
Finally, there is an alternative four channel scheme for ETSI, consisting of channels 1, 5, 9, 13. This
offers significantly less overlap that the other one.
Figure 45 An Alternative Four-Channel Deployment
Load Balancing
Because there is a hard upper limit on an AP’s wireless bandwidth, load balancing can be crucial in
areas crowded with wireless users. Rather than let every user connect and subsequently dilute the
available bandwidth to the point where each connecting device receives a meager trickle, the load
balanced AP instead limits the incoming connections as a means to maintain bandwidth integrity.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 Wireless
There are two kinds of wireless load balancing available on the NWA/WAC:
Loa d ba la ncing by st a t ion num be r limits the number of devices allowed to connect to your AP. If
you know exactly how many stations you want to let connect, choose this option.
For example, if your company’s graphic design team has their own AP and they have 10 computers,
you can load balance for 10. Later, if someone from the sales department visits the graphic design
team’s offices for a meeting and he tries to access the network, his computer’s connection is
delayed, giving it the opportunity to connect to a different, neighboring AP. If he still connects to
the AP regardless of the delay, then the AP may boot other people who are already connected in
order to associate with the new connection.
Loa d ba la n cin g by t r a ffic le ve l limits the number of connections to the AP based on maximum
bandwidth available. If you are uncertain as to the exact number of wireless connections you will
have then choose this option. By setting a maximum bandwidth cap, you allow any number of
devices to connect as long as their total bandwidth usage does not exceed the configured
bandwidth cap associated with this setting. Once the cap is hit, any new connections are rejected or
delayed provided that there are other APs in range.
Imagine a coffee shop in a crowded business district that offers free wireless connectivity to its
customers. The coffee shop owner can’t possibly know how many connections his AP will have at
any given moment. As such, he decides to put a limit on the bandwidth that is available to his
customers but not on the actual number of connections he allows. This means anyone can connect
to his wireless network as long as the AP has the bandwidth to spare. If too many people connect
and the AP hits its bandwidth cap then all new connections must basically wait for their turn or get
shunted to the nearest identical AP.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
76
C HAPT ER
User
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to set up user accounts and user settings for the NWA/WAC.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Use r screen (see Section 7.2 on page 78) provides a summary of all user accounts.
• The Se t t in g screen (see Section 7.3 on page 80) controls default settings, login settings, lockout
settings, and other user settings for the NWA/WAC.
7.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
User Account
A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the NWA/WAC. User accounts are used in
controlling access to configuration and services in the NWA/WAC.
User Types
These are the types of user accounts the NWA/WAC uses.
Table 37 Types of User Accounts
TYPE
ABILITIES
LOGIN METHOD(S)
admin
Change NWA/WAC configuration (web, CLI)
WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP
limited-admin
Look at NWA/WAC configuration (web, CLI)
WWW, TELNET, SSH
Admin Users
Perform basic diagnostics (CLI)
Access Users
user
Used for the embedded RADIUS server and
SNMPv3 user access
Browse user-mode commands (CLI)
Note: The default a dm in account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the
authentication method setting.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
77
Chapter 7 User
7.2 User Summary
The Use r screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen click
Con figu r a t ion > Obj e ct > Use r.
Figure 46 Configuration > Object > User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Configuration > Object > User
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to create a new entry.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify
the entry’s settings.
Remove
To remove an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to
remove it before doing so.
Object Reference
Select an entry and click Obj e ct Re fe r e n ce to open a screen that shows which settings
use the entry.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
User Name
This field displays the user name of each user.
User Type
This field displays type of user this account was configured as.
•
•
•
Description
a dm in - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA/WAC
lim it e d- a dm in - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA/WAC but not to
change it
u se r - this user has access to the NWA/WAC’s services but cannot look at the
configuration
This field displays the description for each user.
7.2.1 Add/Edit User
The Use r Add/ Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one.
7.2.1.1 Rules for User Names
Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters.
The user name can only contain the following characters:
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
78
Chapter 7 User
• Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support)
• _ [underscores]
• - [dashes]
The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other
limitations on user names are:
• User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS
or FTP, it will use the account settings used for 'BOB' not ‘bob’.
• User names have to be different than user group names.
• Here are the reserved user names:
•
adm
•
admin
•
any
•
bin
•
debug
•
devicehaecived
•
ftp
•
games
•
halt
•
ldap-users
•
lp
•
mail
•
news
•
nobody
•
operator
•
radius-users
•
root
•
shutdown
•
sshd
•
sync
•
uucp
•
zyxel
To access this screen, go to the Use r screen, and click Add or Edit .
Figure 47 Configuration > Object > User > Add/Edit A User
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
79
•
daemon
Chapter 7 User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Configuration > User > User > Add/Edit A User
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters,
underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is
case-sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some
words are reserved.
User Type
Select what type of user this is. Choices are:
•
•
•
Password
a dm in - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA/WAC
lim it e d- a dm in - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA/WAC but not to
change it
u se r - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access
Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 - 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Retype
Re-enter the password to make sure you have entered it correctly.
Description
Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII
characters. Default descriptions are provided.
Authentication
Timeout Settings
This field is not available if the user type is u se r.
Lease Time
This field is not available if the user type is u se r.
If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings,
select Use M a nu a l Se t t in gs then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow.
Enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user
is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number
of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen
refreshes in the Web Configurator.
Reauthentication
Time
This field is not available if the user type is u se r.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
Type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the NWA/WAC in one session
before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0
to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Le a se Tim e , the user has no
opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
7.3 Setting
This screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the
NWA/WAC.
To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Con figu r a t ion > Obj e ct > Use r >
Se t t in g.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
80
Chapter 7 User
Figure 48 Configuration > Object > User > Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Configuration > Object > User > Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Default Setting
Default Authentication
Timeout Settings
These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a
new user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts
that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any
user account’s authentication timeout settings.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can
modify the entry’s settings.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry.
User Type
These are the kinds of user account the NWA/WAC supports.
•
•
•
Lease Time
a dm in - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA/
WAC
lim it e d- a dm in - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA/WAC
but not to change it
u se r - this is used for embedded RADIUS server and SNMPv3 user access
This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It
defines the number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before
the user is logged out.
Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the
Web Configurator.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
81
Chapter 7 User
Table 40 Configuration > Object > User > Setting (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Reauthentication Time
This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user
account. It defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the
NWA/WAC in one session before having to log in again. Unlike Le a se Tim e , the
user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
User Logon Settings
Limit the number of
simultaneous logons for
administration account
Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous
logins by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can login as many
times as they want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses.
Maximum number per
administration account
This field is effective when Lim it ... for a dm in ist r a t ion a ccou n t is checked.
Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user.
User Lockout Settings
Enable logon retry limit
Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login
unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked
out for a specified amount of time.
Maximum retry count
This field is effective when En a ble logon r e t r y lim it is checked. Type the
maximum number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP
address is locked out for the specified lock out pe r iod. The number must be
between 1 and 99.
Lockout period
This field is effective when En a ble logon r e t r y lim it is checked. Type the
number of minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon r e t r y lim it
is enabled and the m a x im u m r e t r y cou n t is reached. This number must be
between 1 and 65,535 (about 45.5 days).
Apply
Click Apply to save the changes.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
7.3.1 Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
This screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of
user account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any
existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any
user account’s authentication timeout settings.
To access this screen, go to the Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Use r > Se t t ing screen, select one of
the D e fa ult Aut he nt ica t ion Tim e out Se t t ings entry and click the Edit icon.
Figure 49 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
82
Chapter 7 User
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 User > Setting > Edit User Authentication Timeout Settings
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Type
This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the
default settings.
•
•
Lease Time
a dm in - this user can look at and change the configuration of the NWA/WAC.
lim it e d- a dm in - this user can look at the configuration of the NWA/WAC but not to
change it.
Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session
before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to
make the number of minutes unlimited.
Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web
Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Re ne w button on their
screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically, the users can select this
check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed
before the lease time expires.
Reauthentication
Time
Type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the NWA/WAC
in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes.
You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Le a se Tim e , the user
has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
83
C HAPT ER
AP Profile
8.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure preset profiles for the NWA/WAC.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Ra dio screen (Section 8.2 on page 85) creates radio configurations that can be used by the
APs.
• The SSI D screen (Section 8.3 on page 89) configures three different types of profiles for your
networked APs.
8.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Wireless Profiles
At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the NWA/WAC are profiles. A profile represents a
group of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the
following wireless profile types:
• Ra dio - This profile type defines the properties of an AP’s radio transmitter. You can have a
maximum of 32 radio profiles on the NWA/WAC.
• SSI D - This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by
an AP. Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 32
SSID profiles on the NWA/WAC.
• Se cur it y - This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the
encryption method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a
maximum of 32 security profiles on the NWA/WAC.
• M AC Filt e r in g - This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to
block access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a client’s
MAC address is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the
MAC Filter profile. You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the NWA/WAC.
• La ye r - 2 I sola t ion - This profile defines the MAC addresses of the devices that you want to allow
the associated wireless clients to have access to when layer-2 isolation is enabled.
SSID
The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless
station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same
SSID. In other words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
84
Chapter 8 AP Profile
WEP
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP
and the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both
the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and
decryption.
WPA2
WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA2 and WEP are
improved data encryption and user authentication.
IEEE 802.1x
The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of
wireless stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external
RADIUS server.
8.2 Radio
This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the NWA/WAC. A radio profile is a list of settings
that an NWA/WAC can use to configure its radio transmitter(s). To access this screen click
Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > AP Pr ofile .
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the NWA/WAC.
Figure 50 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new radio profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected radio profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected radio profile.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
85
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 42 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Activate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e .
Inactivate
To turn off an entry, select it and click I n a ct iva t e .
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Status
This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile.
Frequency Band
This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use.
Channel ID
This field indicates the broadcast channel which this radio profile is configured to use.
8.2.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile
This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,
click the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Figure 51 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
86
Chapter 8 AP Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Hide / Show
Advanced Settings
Click this to hide or show the Adva n ce d Se t t in gs in this window.
General Settings
Activate
Select this option to make this profile active.
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profile’s name. Spaces and
underscores are allowed.
802.11 Band
Select the wireless band which this radio profile should use. Not all NWA/WACs support
both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.
2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.
5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients.
If you set 8 0 2 .1 1 Ba n d to 2 .4 G, you can select from the following:
•
•
b/ g: allows either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC adjusts the transmission rate
automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices.
b/ g/ n: allows IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the NWA/WAC. The transmission rate of your NWA/WAC
might be reduced.
If you set 8 0 2 .1 1 Ba n d to 5 G, you can select from the following:
•
•
•
Channel Width
a : allows only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NWA/
WAC.
a / n : allows both IEEE802.11n and IEEE802.11a compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the NWA/WAC. The transmission rate of your NWA/WAC might be
reduced.
a c: allows IEEE 802.11ac compliant WLAN devices to associate with the WAC.
Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network.
Select 2 0 M H z if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in
your neighborhood.
Select 2 0 / 4 0 M H z to allow the NWA/WAC to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or 40
MHz) that has least interference.
Select 2 0 / 4 0 / 8 0 M H z to allow the NWA/WAC to choose the channel bandwidth (20 or
40 or 80 MHz) that has least interference.
Channel
Selection
This is the radio channel which the signal will use for broadcasting by this radio profile.
•
•
D CS: Choose Dynamic Channel Selection to have the NWA/WAC choose a radio
channel that has least interference.
M a n u a l: Choose from the available radio channels in the list. If your NWA/WAC is
outdoor type, be sure to choose non-indoors channels.
DCS Time
Interval
Enter a number of minutes. This regulates how often the NWA/WAC surveys the other
APs within its broadcast radius. If the channel on which it is currently broadcasting
suddenly comes into use by another AP, the NWA/WAC will then dynamically select the
next available clean channel or a channel with lower interference.
Enable DCS
Client Aware
Select this to have the AP wait until all connected clients have disconnected before
switching channels.
If you disable this then the AP switches channels immediately regardless of any client
connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the AP when it switches
channels are dropped.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
87
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 43 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL
2.4 GHz Channel
Selection Method
DESCRIPTION
Select how you want to specify the channels the NWA/WAC switches between for 2.4
GHz operation. This field appears only when you choose 802.11b/g/n mode.
Select a u t o to have the NWA/WAC display a 2 .4 GH z Ch a n n e l D e ploym e n t field you
can use to limit channel switching to 3 or 4 channels.
Select m a n u a l to select the individual channels the NWA/WAC switches between.
Select channels from the Ava ila ble ch a nn e ls list and use the right arrow button to
move them to the Ch a n n e ls se le ct e d list.
2.4 GHz Channel
Deployment
This is available when the 2 .4 GH z Ch a n ne l Se le ct ion M e t hod is set to a ut o.
Select Th r e e - Ch a n n e l D e ploym e n t to limit channel switching to channels 1,6, and
11, the three channels that are sufficiently attenuated to have almost no impact on one
another. In other words, this allows you to minimize channel interference by limiting
channel-hopping to these three “safe” channels.
Select Fou r - Ch a nn e l D e ploym e nt to limit channel switching to four channels.
Depending on the country domain, if the only allowable channels are 1-11 then the
NWA/WAC uses channels 1, 4, 7, 11 in this configuration; otherwise, the NWA/WAC
uses channels 1, 5, 9, 13 in this configuration. Four channel deployment expands your
pool of possible channels while keeping the channel interference to a minimum.
Enable 5 GHz
DFS Aware
Select this if your APs are operating in an area known to have RADAR devices. This
allows the devide to downgrade its frequency to below 5 GHz in the event RADAR signal
is detected, thus preventing it from interfering with that signal.
Enabling this forces the AP to select a non-DFS channel.
5 GHz Channel
Selection Method
Select how you want to specify the channels the NWA/WAC switches between for 5 GHz
operation.
Select Au t o to have the NWA/WAC automatically select the best channel.
Advanced Settings
Guard Interval
Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either sh or t or lon g. This option isn’t
applicable if you choose 20 MHz channel width.
The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order
to reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also
increases interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also
reduces interference.
Enable A-MPDU
Aggregation
Enable A-MSDU
Aggregation
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation.
Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with
their 802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful
for increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error
rates.
Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation.
Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of
their 802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC
header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more
efficient than A-MPDU except in environments that are prone to high error rates.
Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless
clients that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When
enabled, a wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS
(Clear To Send) before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting
packets at the same time (and causing data collisions).
A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that
you enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to
turn RTS/CTS off.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
88
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 43 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Beacon Interval
When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon
interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The
interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power
mode before waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current
consumption of the access point.
DTIM
Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management
mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This
value can be set from 1 to 255.
Enable Signal
Threshold
Select the check box to use the signal threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good
throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP.
Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength
to connect to the AP.
Station Signal
Threshold
Set a minimum client signal strength. A wireless client is allowed to connect to the AP
only when its signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -76 is the weakest.
Disassociate
Station
Threshold
Set a minimum kick-off signal strength. When a wireless client’s signal strength is
lower than the specified threshold, the NWA/WAC disconnects the wireless client from
the AP.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -90 is the weakest.
Allow Station
Connection after
Multiple Retries
Select this option to allow a wireless client to try to associate with the AP again after it
is disconnected due to weak signal strength.
Station Retry
Count
Set the maximum number of times a wireless client can attempt to re-connect to the
AP
Multicast Settings
Transmission
Mode
Specify how the NWA/WAC handles wireless multicast traffic.
Select M ult ica st t o Un ica st to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless
clients as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the
application’s bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic
provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces
duplicate packets.
Select Fix e d M u lt ica st Ra t e to send multicast traffic to all wireless clients at a single
data rate. You must know the multicast application’s bandwidth requirements and set it
in the following field.
Multicast
Rate(Mbps)
If you set Tr a n sm ission M ode to Fix e d M ult ica st Ra t e , select a data rate at which
the NWA/WAC transmits multicast packets to wireless clients. For example, to deploy 4
Mbps video, select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
8.3 SSID
The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an
SSID list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can
assign specific encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them;
and a MAC filter list, which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
89
Chapter 8 AP Profile
8.3.1 SSID List
This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An
SSID, or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless
client can connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for
wireless frequencies (such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network
name when a person makes a connection to it.
To access this screen click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > AP Pr ofile > SSI D.
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 SSID profiles on the NWA/WAC.
Figure 52 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new SSID profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected SSID profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected SSID profile.
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example,
radio profile).
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile.
SSID
This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients.
Security Profile
This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile.
QOS
This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile.
MAC Filtering
Profile
This field indicates which (if any) MAC filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile.
Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
This field indicates which (if any) layer-2 isolation Profile is associated with the SSID
profile.
VLAN ID
This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile.
8.3.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile
This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,
click the Add button or select a SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
90
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Figure 53 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Create new
Object
Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile.
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in
the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
SSID
Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless
clients. Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed.
Security Profile
Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use
the Cr e a t e ne w Obj e ct menu to create one.
Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to
enhance your network security.
MAC Filtering
Profile
Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can
use the Cr e a t e ne w Obj e ct menu to create one.
MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a
particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not
in the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections.
The disa ble setting means no MAC filtering is used.
Layer-2 Isolation
Profile
Select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you
can use the Cr e a t e ne w Obj e ct menu to create one.
Layer-2 isolation allows you to prevent wireless clients associated with your NWA/WAC
from communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.
The disa ble setting means no layer-2 isolation is used.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
91
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 45 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QoS
Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access
categories minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain
categories, such as video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive
nature of their data packets.
QoS access categories are as follows:
disa ble : Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged
with access categories.
W M M : Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The NWA/WAC assigns access
categories to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess
effort. If something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such.
W M M _ VOI CE: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is
recommended if an SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls.
W M M _ VI D EO: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is
recommended for activities like video conferencing.
W M M _ BEST_ EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as “best effort,” meaning
the data travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good
for activities that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the
Internet.
W M M _ BACKGROUN D : All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or
“background traffic”, meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If
traffic from an SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access
category is recommended. For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected
to it.
VLAN ID
Enter a VLAN ID for the NWA/WAC to use to tag traffic originating from this SSID.
Hidden SSID
Select this if you want to “hide” your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless
clients in the vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a
potential connection. Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway.
When a SSID is “hidden” and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect
to the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup
screen(s) (these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system).
Enable Intra-BSS
Traffic Blocking
Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
8.4 Security List
This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs.
Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations
that are connected to it.
To access this screen click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > AP Pr ofile > SSI D > Se cur it y List .
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
92
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Figure 54 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new security profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected security profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected security profile.
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for
example, SSID profile).
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile.
Security Mode
This field indicates this profile’s security mode (if any).
8.4.1 Add/Edit Security Profile
This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,
click the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Note: This screen’s options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default
screen is displayed here.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
93
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Figure 55 SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in
the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores
are allowed.
Security Mode
Select a security mode from the list: n on e , w e p, w pa 2 , or w pa 2 - m ix .
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
94
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 47 SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Radius Server Type
This shows Ex t e r n a l and the NWA/WAC uses an external RADIUS server for
authentication.
Primary /
Secondary Radius
Server Activate
Select this to have the NWA/WAC use the specified RADIUS server.
Radius Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server
Port
Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Radius Server
Secret
Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication.
Primary /
Secondary
Accounting Server
Activate
Select the check box to enable user accounting through an external authentication
server.
Accounting
Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
Accounting
Server Port
Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is
1813. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you
to do so with additional information.
Accounting
Share Secret
Enter a password (up to 128 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external accounting server and the NWA/WAC. The key must be the same on the
external accounting server and your NWA/WAC. The key is not sent over the network.
802.1X
ReAuthenticatio
n Timer
Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication.
Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited
requests.
WEP Authentication Settings
Idle Timeout
Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is
discontinued.
Authentication Type
Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Ope n or Sh a r e key. Sh a r e key is
only available if you are not using 802.1x.
Key Length
Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections.
If you select W EP- 6 4 :
•
Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,
0x11AA22BB33) for each Ke y used.
or
•
Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for
example, MyKey) for each Ke y used.
If you select W EP- 1 2 8 :
•
Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of “A-F”, “a-f” and “0-9” (for example,
0x00112233445566778899AABBCC) for each Ke y used.
or
•
Key 1~4
Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from “a-z”, “A-Z” and “0-9” (for
example, MyKey12345678) for each Ke y used.
Based on your Ke y Le n gt h selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or
ASCII key.
WPA2/WPA2-Mix Authentication Settings
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
95
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 47 SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PSK
This field is available when you select the w pa 2 , or w pa 2 - m ix security mode.
Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key with WPA2 encryption.
Pre-Shared Key
Cipher Type
Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.
Select an encryption cipher type from the list.
•
•
•
a u t o - This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in
use by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection.
t k ip - This is the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption method added later to
the WEP encryption protocol to further secure. Not all wireless clients may support
this.
a e s - This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more
recent development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients
may support this.
Idle Timeout
Enter the interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is
discontinued.
Group Key Update
Timer
Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA2 encryption key.
Management Frame
Protection
This field is available only when you select w pa 2 or w pa 2 - m ix in the Se cu r it y M ode
field and set Ciph e r Type to a e s.
Data frames in 802.11 WLANs can be encrypted and authenticated with WEP, WPA or
WPA2. But 802.11 management frames, such as beacon/probe response, association
request, association response, de-authentication and disassociation are always
unauthenticated and unencrypted. IEEE 802.11w Protected Management Frames allows
APs to use the existing security mechanisms (encryption and authentication methods
defined in IEEE 802.11i WPA/WPA2) to protect management frames. This helps prevent
wireless DoS attacks.
Select the check box to enable management frame protection (MFP) to add security to
802.11 management frames.
Select Opt ion a l if you do not require the wireless clients to support MFP. Management
frames will be encrypted if the clients support MFP.
Select Re qu ir e d and wireless clients must support MFP in order to join the NWA/WAC’s
wireless network.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
8.5 MAC Filter List
This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your
SSIDs. To access this screen click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > AP Pr ofile > SSI D > M AC Filt e r
List .
Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
96
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Figure 56 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for
example, SSID profile).
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile.
Filter Action
This field indicates this profile’s filter action (if any).
8.5.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this
screen, click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button.
Note: Each MAC filtering profile can include a maximum of 512 MAC addresses.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
97
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Figure 57 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in
the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
Filter Action
Select a llow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect
to the network through the associated SSID; select de n y to block the wireless clients with
the specified MAC addresses.
Add
Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
MAC
This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile.
Description
This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can
click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores
allowed.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
8.6 Layer-2 Isolation List
Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent wireless clients associated with your NWA/WAC from
communicating with other wireless clients, APs, computers or routers in a network.
In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the NWA/WAC to allow a guest wireless
client (A) to access the main network router (B). The router provides access to the Internet and the
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
98
Chapter 8 AP Profile
network printer (C) while preventing the client from accessing other computers and servers on the
network. The client can communicate with other wireless clients only if Intra-BSS Traffic blocking is
disabled.
Note: Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking is activated when you enable layer-2 isolation.
Figure 58 Layer-2 Isolation Application
MAC addresses that are not listed in the layer-2 isolation table are blocked from communicating
with the NWA/WAC’s wireless clients except for broadcast packets. Layer-2 isolation does not check
the traffic between wireless clients that are associated with the same AP. Intra-BSS traffic allows
wireless clients associated with the same AP to communicate with each other.
This screen allows you to specify devices you want the users on your wireless networks to access.
To access this screen click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > AP Pr ofile > SSI D > La ye r - 2 I sola t ion
List .
Figure 59 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for
example, SSID profile).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
99
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 50 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Layer-2 Isolation List (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the layer-2 isolation profile.
8.6.1 Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile
This screen allows you to create a new layer-2 isolation profile or edit an existing one. To access
this screen, click the Add button or select a layer-2 isolation profile from the list and click the Edit
button.
Note: You need to know the MAC address of each wireless client, AP, computer or router
that you want to allow to communicate with the NWA/WAC's wireless clients.
Figure 60 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in
the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are
allowed.
Add
Click this to add a MAC address to the profile’s list.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profile’s list.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profile’s list.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user.
MAC
This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile.
Description
This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can
click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores
allowed.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
100
Chapter 8 AP Profile
Table 51 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit Layer-2 Isolation Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
101
C HAPT ER
MON Profile
9.1 Overview
This screen allows you to set up monitor mode configurations that allow your NWA/WAC to scan for
other wireless devices in the vicinity. Once detected, you can use the W ir e le ss > M ON M ode
screen (Section 6.3 on page 69) to classify them as either rogue or friendly.
Not all NWA/WACs support monitor mode and rogue APs detection.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The M ON Pr ofile screen (Section 9.2 on page 102) creates preset monitor mode configurations
that can be used by the NWA/WAC.
9.2 MON Profile
This screen allows you to create monitor mode configurations that can be used by the APs. To
access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Con figu r a t ion > Obj e ct > M ON
Pr ofile .
Figure 61 Configuration > Object > MON Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Configuration > Object > MON Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new monitor mode profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected monitor mode profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected monitor mode profile.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
102
Chapter 9 MON Profile
Table 52 Configuration > Object > MON Profile (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Activate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e .
Inactivate
To turn off an entry, select it and click I n a ct iva t e .
Object Reference
Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected monitor mode profile (for
example, an AP management profile).
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Status
This field shows whether or not the entry is activated.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor profile.
9.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile
This screen allows you to create a new monitor mode profile or edit an existing one. To access this
screen, click the Add button or select and existing monitor mode profile and click the Edit button.
Figure 62 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
103
Chapter 9 MON Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Activate
Select this to activate this monitor mode profile.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor mode profile.
Channel dwell time
Enter the interval (in milliseconds) before the NWA/WAC switches to another channel
for monitoring.
Scan Channel Mode
Select a u t o to have the NWA/WAC switch to the next sequential channel once the
Ch a n n e l dw e ll t im e expires.
Select m a n u a l to set specific channels through which to cycle sequentially when the
Ch a n n e l dw e ll t im e expires. Selecting this options makes the Sca n Ch a n ne l List
options available.
Set Scan Channel
List (2.4 GHz)
Move a channel from the Ava ila ble ch a n n e ls column to the Ch a n n e ls se le ct e d
column to have the NWA/WAC using this profile scan that channel when Sca n Ch a nn e l
M ode is set to m a n u a l.
These channels are limited to the 2.4 GHz range (802.11 b/g/n).
Set Scan Channel
List (5 GHz)
Move a channel from the Ava ila ble ch a n n e ls column to the Ch a n n e ls se le ct e d
column to have the NWA/WAC using this profile scan that channel when Sca n Ch a nn e l
M ode is set to m a n u a l.
These channels are limited to the 5 GHz range (802.11 a/n). Not all NWA/WACs
support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
9.3 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this
chapter.
Rogue APs
Rogue APs are wireless access points operating in a network’s coverage area that are not under the
control of the network’s administrators, and can open up holes in a network’s security. Attackers
can take advantage of a rogue AP’s weaker (or non-existent) security to gain access to the network,
or set up their own rogue APs in order to capture information from wireless clients. If a scan reveals
a rogue AP, you can use commercially-available software to physically locate it.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
104
Chapter 9 MON Profile
Figure 63 Rogue AP Example
RG
In the example above, a corporate network’s security is compromised by a rogue AP (RG) set up by
an employee at his workstation in order to allow him to connect his notebook computer wirelessly
(A). The company’s legitimate wireless network (the dashed ellipse B) is well-secured, but the
rogue AP uses inferior security that is easily broken by an attacker (X) running readily available
encryption-cracking software. In this example, the attacker now has access to the company
network, including sensitive data stored on the file server (C).
Friendly APs
If you have more than one AP in your wireless network, you should also configure a list of “friendly”
APs. Friendly APs are other wireless access points that are detected in your network, as well as any
others that you know are not a threat (those from recognized networks, for example). It is
recommended that you export (save) your list of friendly APs often, especially if you have a
network with a large number of access points.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
105
C HAPTER
10
WDS Profile
10.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure WDS (Wireless Disbribution System) profiles for the NWA/
WAC to form a WDS with other APs.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The W D S Pr ofile screen (Section 10.2 on page 106) creates preset WDS configurations that can be
used by the NWA/WAC.
10.2 WDS Profile
This screen allows you to manage and create WDS profiles that can be used by the APs. To access
this screen, click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > W D S Pr ofile .
Figure 64 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click this to add a new profile.
Edit
Click this to edit the selected profile.
Remove
Click this to remove the selected profile.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile.
Profile Name
This field indicates the name assigned to the profile.
WDS SSID
This field shows the SSID specified in this WDS profile.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
106
Chapter 10 WDS Profile
10.2.1 Add/Edit WDS Profile
This screen allows you to create a new WDS profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen,
click the Add button or select and existing profile and click the Edit button.
Figure 65 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Configuration > Object > WDS Profile > Add/Edit WDS Profile
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Profile Name
Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name.
WDS SSID
Enter the SSID with which you want the NWA/WAC to connect to a root AP or repeater
to form a WDS.
Pre-Shared Key
Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters.
The key is used to encrypt the traffic between the APs.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
107
C HAPTER
11
Certificates
11.1 Overview
The NWA/WAC can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are
based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public
key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The M y Ce r t ifica t e screens (Section 11.2 on page 111) generate and export self-signed
certificates or certification requests and import the NWA/WAC’s CA-signed certificates.
• The Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s screens (Section 11.3 on page 119) save CA certificates and trusted
remote host certificates to the NWA/WAC. The NWA/WAC trusts any valid certificate that you
have imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the
certificates that you have imported as a trusted certificate.
11.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and
can be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure.
These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as “digital
signatures”). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what
your signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone
else. In the same way, your private key “writes” your digital signature and your public key allows
people to verify whether data was signed by you, or by someone else.
This process works as follows:
Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that
the message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public
key pair (one public key and one private key).
Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who
receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him
or not.
Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny.
Jenny receives the message and uses Tim’s public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is
from Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can
have altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tim’s private key).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
108
Chapter 11 Certificates
Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jenny’s public key to
verify the message.
The NWA/WAC uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to
establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The
method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the
type of connection.
The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the
certification authority’s public key to verify the certificates.
A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate.
The NWA/WAC does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.
Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates.
A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL
(Certificate Revocation List). The NWA/WAC can check a peer’s certificate against a directory
server’s list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies
that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).
Advantages of Certificates
Certificates offer the following benefits.
• The NWA/WAC only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to
trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.
• Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you
never need to transmit private keys.
Self-signed Certificates
You can have the NWA/WAC act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.
Factory Default Certificate
The NWA/WAC generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This
certificate is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate.
Certificate File Formats
Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters,
uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital
signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The
private key is not included. The NWA/WAC currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that
contains a single certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase
letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable
form.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
109
Chapter 11 Certificates
• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The
private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not
connected to your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this
and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the NWA/WAC.
Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy
for this to occur since many programs use text files by default.
11.1.3 Verifying a Certificate
Before you import a trusted certificate into the NWA/WAC, you should verify that you have the
correct certificate. You can do this using the certificate’s fingerprint. A certificate’s fingerprint is a
message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes
how to check a certificate’s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate.
Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer.
Make sure that the certificate has a “.cer” or “.crt” file name extension.
Double-click the certificate’s icon to open the Ce r t ifica t e window. Click the D e t a ils tab and scroll
down to the Thum bpr int Algor it hm and Th um bpr int fields.
Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the
Th um bpr in t Algor it h m and Th u m bpr in t fields. The secure method may very based on your
situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
110
Chapter 11 Certificates
11.2 My Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > M y Ce r t ifica t e s to open this screen. This is the
NWA/WAC’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 66 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage
Space in Use
This bar displays the percentage of the NWA/WAC’s PKI storage space that is currently in
use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or
unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
Add
Click this to go to the screen where you can have the NWA/WAC generate a certificate or
a certification request.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate.
Remove
The NWA/WAC keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading
a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove
an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to remove it
before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Object Reference
You cannot delete certificates that any of the NWA/WAC’s features are configured to use.
Select an entry and click Obj e ct Re fe r e n ce to open a screen that shows which settings
use the entry.
This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical
order.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you
give each certificate a unique name.
Type
This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a
certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the M y
Ce r t ifica t e I m por t screen to import the certificate and replace the request.
SELF represents a self-signed certificate.
CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
111
Chapter 11 Certificates
Table 56 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Subject
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the
Subj e ct field.
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import
Click I m por t to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the NWA/WAC.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh to display the current validity status of the certificates.
11.2.1 Add My Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > M y Ce r t ifica t e s and then the Add icon to open
the Add M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen. Use this screen to have the NWA/WAC create a self-signed
certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
112
Chapter 11 Certificates
Figure 67 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
113
Chapter 11 Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and
;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Subject Information
Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You
do not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a H ost I P Addr e ss, H ost
D om a in N a m e , or E- M a il. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial
number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended
that each certificate have unique subject information.
Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address, domain name or
e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or email address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for
identification purposes only and can be any string.
A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters,
the hyphen and periods.
An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters,
the hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore.
Organizational Unit
Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs.
You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen
and the underscore.
Organization
Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up
to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the
underscore.
Town (City)
Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31
characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
State (Province)
Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to
31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Country
Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31
characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore.
Key Type
Select RSA to use the Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm.
Select D SA to use the Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm.
Key Length
Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key
should use (512 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also
uses more PKI storage space.
Enrollment Options
These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.
Create a self-signed
certificate
Select this to have the NWA/WAC generate the certificate and act as the Certification
Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for
certificates.
Create a certification
request and save it
locally for later
manual enrollment
Select this to have the NWA/WAC generate and store a request for a certificate. Use
the M y Ce r t ifica t e Edit screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to
the certification authority.
Copy the certification request from the M y Ce r t ifica t e Edit screen and then send it to
the certification authority.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
114
Chapter 11 Certificates
Table 57 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Create a certification
request and enroll for
a certificate
immediately online
Select this to have the NWA/WAC generate a request for a certificate and apply to a
certification authority for a certificate.
You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Tr u st e d
Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
When you select this option, you must select the certification authority’s enrollment
protocol and the certification authority’s certificate from the drop-down list boxes and
enter the certification authority’s server address. You also need to fill in the
Re fe r e n ce N um be r and Ke y if the certification authority requires them.
Enrollment Protocol
This field applies when you select Cr e a t e a ce r t ifica t ion r e qu e st a n d e n r oll for a
ce r t ifica t e im m e dia t e ly on lin e . Select the certification authority’s enrollment
protocol from the drop-down list box.
Sim ple Ce r t ifica t e En r ollm e n t Pr ot ocol ( SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment
protocol that was developed by VeriSign and Cisco.
Ce r t ifica t e M a n a ge m e n t Pr ot ocol ( CM P) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that
was developed by the Public Key Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510.
CA Server Address
This field applies when you select Cr e a t e a ce r t ifica t ion r e qu e st a n d e n r oll for a
ce r t ifica t e im m e dia t e ly on lin e . Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification
authority server.
For a URL, you can use up to 511 of the following characters. a-zA-Z0-9'()+,/
:.=?;!*#@$_%-
CA Certificate
This field applies when you select Cr e a t e a ce r t ifica t ion r e qu e st a n d e n r oll for a
ce r t ifica t e im m e dia t e ly on lin e . Select the certification authority’s certificate from
the CA Ce r t ifica t e drop-down list box.
You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Tr u st e d
Ce r t ifica t e s screen. Click Tr ust e d CAs to go to the Tr u st e d Ce r t ifica t e s screen
where you can view (and manage) the NWA/WAC's list of certificates of trusted
certification authorities.
Request
Authentication
When you select Cr e a t e a ce r t ifica t ion r e qu e st a n d e n r oll for a ce r t ifica t e
im m e dia t e ly on lin e , the certification authority may want you to include a reference
number and key to identify you when you send a certification request.
Fill in both the Re fe r e n ce N u m be r and the Ke y fields if your certification authority
uses the CMP enrollment protocol. Just the Ke y field displays if your certification
authority uses the SCEP enrollment protocol.
For the reference number, use 0 to 99999999.
For the key, use up to 31 of the following characters. a-zA-Z09;|`~!@#$%^&*()_+\{}':,./<>=-
OK
Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to quit and return to the M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
If you configured the Add M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen to have the NWA/WAC enroll a certificate and
the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Re t ur n button that takes you
back to the Add M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen. Click Re t ur n and check your information in the Add M y
Ce r t ifica t e s screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your
Internet connection is working properly if you want the NWA/WAC to enroll a certificate online.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
115
Chapter 11 Certificates
11.2.2 Edit My Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > M y Ce r t ifica t e s and then the Edit icon to open
the M y Ce r t ifica t e Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information
and change the certificate’s name.
Figure 68 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
116
Chapter 11 Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31
alphanumeric and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Certification Path
This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request.
Click the Re fr e sh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of
certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself).
If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted
certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with
the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is
the only one in the list. The NWA/WAC does not trust the certificate and displays “Not
trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh to display the certification path.
Certificate
Information
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s
owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). “X.509” means that this
certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that
defines the formats for public-key certificates.
Version
This field displays the X.509 version number. “
Serial Number
This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification
authority or generated by the NWA/WAC.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as
Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and
Country (C).
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Su bj e ct N a m e field.
“none” displays for a certification request.
Signature Algorithm
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The NWA/
WAC uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1
hash algorithm). Some certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA publicprivate key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. “none” displays for a
certification request.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. “none” displays for a
certification request.
Key Algorithm
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key
pair (the NWA/WAC uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024
bits for example).
Subject Alternative
Name
This field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail
address (EMAIL).
Key Usage
This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,
“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and
“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint
This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject
Type=CA means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length
Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the
certificate’s path. This field does not display for a certification request.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
117
Chapter 11 Certificates
Table 58 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MD5 Fingerprint
This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA/WAC calculated using the MD5
algorithm.
SHA1 Fingerprint
This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA/WAC calculated using the SHA1
algorithm.
Certificate in PEM
(Base-64) Encoded
Format
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and
numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority’s web page,
an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on
a management computer for later manual enrollment.
You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or
you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a
management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate
Only
Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button
and then Sa ve in the File D ow n loa d screen. The Sa ve As screen opens, browse to the
location that you want to use and click Sa ve .
Password
If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it
here. Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you
import the certificate to another device.
Export Certificate
with Private Key
Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the
certificate’s password and click this button. Click Sa ve in the File D ow n loa d screen.
The Sa ve As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Sa ve .
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC. You can only change the name.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to quit and return to the M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
11.2.3 Import Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > M y Ce r t ifica t e s > I m por t to open the M y
Ce r t ifica t e I m por t screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to
the NWA/WAC.
Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that
was generated by the NWA/WAC. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12
format, including the certificate’s public and private keys.
The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
You must remove any spaces in the certificate’s filename before you can import it.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
118
Chapter 11 Certificates
Figure 69 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se to find it.
You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the NWA/
WAC.
Browse
Click Br ow se to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Password
This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the file’s password
that was created when the PKCS #12 file was exported.
OK
Click OK to save the certificate on the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to quit and return to the M y Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
11.3 Trusted Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s to open the Tr u st e d
Ce r t ifica t e s screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the NWA/
WAC to accept as trusted. The NWA/WAC also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on
this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of
these certificates.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
119
Chapter 11 Certificates
Figure 70 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PKI Storage
Space in Use
This bar displays the percentage of the NWA/WAC’s PKI storage space that is currently in
use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or
unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of
information about the certificate.
Remove
The NWA/WAC keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading
a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove
an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to remove it
before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.
Object Reference
You cannot delete certificates that any of the NWA/WAC’s features are configured to use.
Select an entry and click Obj e ct Re fe r e n ce to open a screen that shows which settings
use the entry.
This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical
order.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the
Su bj e ct field.
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired.
Import
Click I m por t to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
authority that you trust, from your computer to the NWA/WAC.
Refresh
Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
120
Chapter 11 Certificates
11.3.1 Edit Trusted Certificates
Click Con figu r a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s and then a certificate’s Edit
icon to open the Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information
about the certificate, change the certificate’s name and set whether or not you want the NWA/WAC
to check a certification authority’s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by
the certification authority.
Figure 71 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
121
Chapter 11 Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You
can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=- characters.
Certification Path
Click the Re fr e sh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s
certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of
certification authorities that validate the end entity’s certificate. If the issuing
certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be
the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entity’s own certificate).
The NWA/WAC does not trust the end entity’s certificate and displays “Not trusted” in
this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh to display the certification path.
Enable X.509v3 CRL
Distribution Points
and OCSP checking
Select this check box to have the NWA/WAC check incoming certificates that are signed
by this certificate against a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or an OCSP server. You also
need to configure the OSCP or LDAP server details.
OCSP Server
Select this check box if the directory server uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status
Protocol).
URL
Type the protocol, IP address and pathname of the OCSP server.
ID
The NWA/WAC may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the OCSP server. Type
the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server
(usually a certification authority).
Password
Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the OCSP
server (usually a certification authority).
LDAP Server
Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of
certificates and lists of revoked certificates.
Address
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server.
Port
Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server
port number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for
LDAP.
ID
The NWA/WAC may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory
server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the
server (usually a certification authority).
Password
Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL
directory server (usually a certification authority).
Certificate
Information
These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s
owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this
certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that
defines the formats for public-key certificates.
Version
This field displays the X.509 version number.
Serial Number
This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification
authority.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as
Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country.
With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Su bj e ct N a m e field.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
122
Chapter 11 Certificates
Table 61 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Signature Algorithm
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some
certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption
algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsapkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in
red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become
applicable.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has
already expired.
Key Algorithm
This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key
pair (the NWA/WAC uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024
bits for example).
Subject Alternative
Name
This field displays the certificate’s owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or email address (EMAIL).
Key Usage
This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example,
“DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and
“KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.
Basic Constraint
This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject
Type=CA means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length
Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the
certificate’s path.
MD5 Fingerprint
This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA/WAC calculated using the MD5
algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the
phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.
SHA1 Fingerprint
This is the certificate’s message digest that the NWA/WAC calculated using the SHA1
algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the
phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.
Certificate
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and
numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or
you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a
management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Export Certificate
Click this button and then Sa ve in the File D ow n loa d screen. The Sa ve As screen
opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Sa ve .
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC. You can only change the name.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to quit and return to the Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
11.3.2 Import Trusted Certificates
Click Configur a t ion > Obj e ct > Ce r t ifica t e > Tr u st e d Ce r t ifica t e s > I m por t to open the
I m por t Tr ust e d Ce r t ifica t e s screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted
certificate to the NWA/WAC.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
the certificate.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
123
Chapter 11 Certificates
Figure 72 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se to find it.
You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the NWA/
WAC.
Browse
Click Br ow se to find the certificate file you want to upload.
OK
Click OK to save the certificate on the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to quit and return to the previous screen.
11.4 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this
chapter.
OCSP
OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) allows an application or device to check whether a
certificate is valid. With OCSP the NWA/WAC checks the status of individual certificates instead of
downloading a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). OCSP has two main advantages over a CRL. The
first is real-time status information. The second is a reduction in network traffic since the NWA/WAC
only gets information on the certificates that it needs to verify, not a huge list. When the NWA/WAC
requests certificate status information, the OCSP server returns a “expired”, “current” or “unknown”
response.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
124
C HAPTER
12
System
12.1 Overview
Use the system screens to configure general NWA/WAC settings.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The H ost N a m e screen (Section 12.2 on page 125) configures a unique name for the NWA/WAC
in your network.
• The D a t e / Tim e screen (Section 12.3 on page 126) configures the date and time for the NWA/
WAC.
• The W W W screens (Section 12.4 on page 129) configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to
the NWA/WAC.
• The SSH screen (Section 12.5 on page 140) configures SSH (Secure SHell) for securely
accessing the NWA/WAC’s command line interface.
• The Te ln e t screen (Section 12.6 on page 144) configures Telnet for accessing the NWA/WAC’s
command line interface.
• The FTP screen (Section 12.7 on page 144) specifies FTP server settings. You can upload and
download the NWA/WAC’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. Please also see Chapter 14
on page 162 for more information about firmware and configuration files.
• The SN M P screens (Section 12.8 on page 145) configure the device’s SNMP settings, including
profiles that define allowed SNMPv3 access.
12.2 Host Name
A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Con figu r a t ion >
Syst e m > H ost N a m e to open this screen.
Figure 73 Configuration > System > Host Name
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
125
Chapter 12 System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Configuration > System > Host Name
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Name
Choose a descriptive name to identify your NWA/WAC device. This name can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (_) and
periods (.) are accepted.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients
connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254
alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” are accepted.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.3 Date and Time
For effective scheduling and logging, the NWA/WAC system time must be accurate. The NWA/WAC
has a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an
external server.
To change your NWA/WAC’s time based on your local time zone and date, click Configur a t ion >
Syst e m > D a t e / Tim e . The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the NWA/WAC’s time
and date or have the NWA/WAC get the date and time from a time server.
Figure 74 Configuration > System > Date/Time
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
126
Chapter 12 System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Configuration > System > Date/Time
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Time and
Date
Current Time
This field displays the present time of your NWA/WAC.
Current Date
This field displays the present date of your NWA/WAC.
Time and Date
Setup
Manual
Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time
and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight
saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings
manually, the NWA/WAC uses the new setting once you click Apply.
New Time
(hh:mm:ss)
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured
manually.
When you set Tim e a nd D a t e Se t up to M a n u a l, enter the new time in this field and
then click Apply.
New Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured
manually.
When you set Tim e a nd D a t e Se t up to M a n u a l, enter the new date in this field and
then click Apply.
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the NWA/WAC get the time and date from the time
server you specify below. The NWA/WAC requests time and date settings from the time
server under the following circumstances.
•
•
•
When the NWA/WAC starts up.
When you click Apply or Sync. N ow in this screen.
24-hour intervals after starting up.
Time Server
Address
Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network
administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Sync. Now
Click this button to have the NWA/WAC get the time and date from a time server (see
the Tim e Se r ve r Addr e ss field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight
saving settings).
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your
time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Enable Daylight
Saving
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks
ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected En a ble
D a yligh t Sa vin g. The a t field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would select Se con d, Sun da y, M a r ch and type
2 in the a t field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of
the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select La st ,
Su nda y, M a r ch . The time you type in the a t field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
127
Chapter 12 System
Table 64 Configuration > System > Date/Time (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
End Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected En a ble
D a yligh t Sa vin g. The a t field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would select Fir st , Su n da y, N ove m be r and type 2 in the a t
field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of
the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select La st ,
Su nda y, Oct obe r. The time you type in the a t field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Offset
Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends.
Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments).
For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will
appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.3.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List
When you turn on the NWA/WAC for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01
00:00:00. The NWA/WAC then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of
Network Time Protocol (NTP) time servers.
The NWA/WAC continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not
specify a time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified.
Table 65 Default Time Servers
0.pool.ntp.org
1.pool.ntp.org
2.pool.ntp.org
When the NWA/WAC uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server
and tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the NWA/WAC goes through the
rest of the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP
time servers have been tried.
12.3.2 Time Server Synchronization
Click the Sync. N ow button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the
Tim e Se r ve r Addr e ss field.
When the Loa ding message appears, you may have to wait up to one minute.
Figure 75 Loading
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
128
Chapter 12 System
The Cur r e nt Tim e and Cur r e nt D a t e fields will display the appropriate settings if the
synchronization is successful.
If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the Vie w Log screen. Try re-configuring
the D a t e / Tim e screen.
To manually set the NWA/WAC date and time:
Click Syst e m > D a t e / Tim e .
Select M a nua l under Tim e a n d D a t e Se t u p.
Enter the NWA/WAC’s time in the N e w Tim e field.
Enter the NWA/WAC’s date in the N e w D a t e field.
Under Tim e Zon e Se t u p, select your Tim e Zon e from the list.
As an option you can select the En a ble D a yligh t Sa vin g check box to adjust the NWA/WAC clock
for daylight savings.
Click Apply.
To get the NWA/WAC date and time from a time server:
Click Syst e m > D a t e / Tim e .
Select Ge t fr om Tim e Se r ve r under Tim e a nd D a t e Se t up.
Under Tim e Zon e Se t u p, select your Tim e Zon e from the list.
Under Tim e a n d D a t e Se t u p, enter a Tim e Se r ve r Addr e ss.
Click Apply.
12.4 WWW Overview
The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the NWA/WAC coming in from the
WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP, Telnet, and FTP management access are not secure.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
129
Chapter 12 System
Figure 76 Secure and Insecure Service Access From the WAN
12.4.1 Service Access Limitations
A service cannot be used to access the NWA/WAC when you have disabled that service in the
corresponding screen.
12.4.2 System Timeout
There is a lease timeout for administrators. The NWA/WAC automatically logs you out if the
management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session
does not time out when a statistics screen is polling.
Each user is also forced to log in the NWA/WAC for authentication again when the reauthentication
time expires.
You can change the timeout settings in the Use r screens.
12.4.3 HTTPS
You can set the NWA/WAC to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator
sessions.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol
that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol
that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot
read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data
integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys (see Chapter 11 on page 108 for more
information).
HTTPS on the NWA/WAC is used so that you can securely access the NWA/WAC using the Web
Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the NWA/WAC) must always
authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the
NWA/WAC), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server
requires it to do so (select Aut he nt ica t e Clie nt Ce r t ifica t e s in the W W W screen). Aut he nt ica t e
Clie nt Ce r t ifica t e s is optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the NWA/WAC a
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
130
Chapter 12 System
certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the
NWA/WAC.
Please refer to the following figure.
HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the
NWA/WAC’s web server.
HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the NWA/WAC’s web
server.
Figure 77 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation
Note: If you disable H TTP in the W W W screen, then the NWA/WAC blocks all HTTP
connection attempts.
12.4.4 Configuring WWW Service Control
Click Configur a t ion > Syst e m > W W W to open the W W W screen. Use this screen to specify
HTTP or HTTPS settings.
Figure 78 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
131
Chapter 12 System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
HTTPS
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that
matches the IP address(es) in the Se r vice Con t r ol table to access the NWA/WAC
Web Configurator using secure HTTPs connections.
Server Port
The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port
to a different number on the NWA/WAC, for example 8443, then you must notify
people who need to access the NWA/WAC Web Configurator to use “https://NWA/WAC
IP Address:8 4 4 3 ” as the URL.
Authenticate Client
Certificates
Select Au t h e n t ica t e Clie n t Ce r t ifica t e s (optional) to require the SSL client to
authenticate itself to the NWA/WAC by sending the NWA/WAC a certificate. To do that
the SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as
a trusted CA on the NWA/WAC.
Server Certificate
Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the NWA/WAC) uses to authenticate itself to the
HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the M y Ce r t ifica t e s
screen.
Redirect HTTP to
HTTPS
To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP
connection requests to the HTTPS server.
HTTP
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that
matches the IP address(es) in the Se r vice Con t r ol table to access the NWA/WAC
Web Configurator using HTTP connections.
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must
use the same port number in order to use that service to access the NWA/WAC.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.4.5 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the NWA/WAC, then in your browser enter
“https://NWA/WAC IP Address/” as the web site address where “NWA/WAC IP Address” is the IP
address or domain name of the NWA/WAC you wish to access.
12.4.5.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the NWA/WAC HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in
the following screen.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
132
Chapter 12 System
Figure 79 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer)
Select Con t in u e t o t h is w e bsit e . to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen. Otherwise,
select Click he r e t o close t his w e bpa ge . to block the access.
12.4.5.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the NWA/WAC HTTPS server, a The Conne ct ion is Unt r ust e d screen
appears as shown in the following screen. Click Te chnica l D e t a ils if you want to verify more
information about the certificate from the NWA/WAC.
Select I Un de r st a nd t he Risk s and then click Add Ex ce pt ion to add the NWA/WAC to the
security exception list. Click Confir m Se cur it y Ex ce pt ion .
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
133
Chapter 12 System
Figure 80 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox)
Figure 81 Security Certificate 2 (Firefox)
12.4.5.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages
Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the NWA/WAC’s HTTPS server
certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:
• The issuing certificate authority of the NWA/WAC’s HTTPS server certificate is not one of the
browser’s trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the NWA/WAC's
factory default certificate is the NWA/WAC itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
134
Chapter 12 System
• For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your
operating system as a trusted certificate.
• To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate
authority’s certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. Refer to Appendix A on
page 188 for details.
12.4.5.4 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates
The SSL client needs a certificate if Aut he nt ica t e Clie nt Ce r t ifica t e s is selected on the NWA/
WAC.
You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the NWA/WAC in order for the Aut he nt ica t e
Clie nt Ce r t ifica t e s to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details).
Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the NWA/WAC (see the
NWA/WAC’s Tr u st e d Ce r t ifica t e s Web Configurator screen).
Figure 82 Trusted Certificates
The CA sends you a package containing the CA’s trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s)
and a password to install the personal certificate(s).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
135
Chapter 12 System
12.4.5.5 Installing the CA’s Certificate
Double click the CA’s trusted certificate to produce a screen similar to the one shown next.
Click I n st a ll Ce r t ifica t e and follow the wizard as shown earlier in this appendix.
12.4.5.6 Installing a Personal Certificate
You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it
during the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a
screen similar to the one shown next
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
136
Chapter 12 System
Click N e x t to begin the wizard.
The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File
na m e text box. Click Br ow se if you wish to import a different certificate.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
137
Chapter 12 System
Enter the password given to you by the CA.
Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Pla ce
a ll ce r t ifica t e s in t h e follow ing st or e and choose a different location.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
138
Chapter 12 System
Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process.
You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer.
12.4.5.7 Using a Certificate When Accessing the NWA/WAC
To access the NWA/WAC via HTTPS:
Enter ‘https://NWA/WAC IP Address/ in your browser’s web address field.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
139
Chapter 12 System
When Aut he nt ica t e Clie nt Ce r t ifica t e s is selected on the NWA/WAC, the following screen asks
you to select a personal certificate to send to the NWA/WAC. This screen displays even if you only
have a single certificate as in the example.
You next see the Web Configurator login screen.
12.5 SSH
You can use SSH (Secure SHell) to securely access the NWA/WAC’s command line interface.
SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to
provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the
following figure, computer B on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the NWA/WAC (A) for
a management session.
Figure 83 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example
12.5.1 How SSH Works
The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote
hosts using SSH v1.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
140
Chapter 12 System
Figure 84 How SSH v1 Works Example
Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a
host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key
and sends the result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server
public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption
method to use.
Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established
between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user
name and password) to the server to log in to the server.
12.5.2 SSH Implementation on the NWA/WAC
Your NWA/WAC supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption
methods (AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the NWA/WAC for
management using port 22 (by default).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
141
Chapter 12 System
12.5.3 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system)
that is used to connect to the NWA/WAC over SSH.
12.5.4 Configuring SSH
Click Configur a t ion > Syst e m > SSH to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure
your NWA/WAC’s Secure Shell settings.
Note: It is recommended that you disable Telnet and FTP when you configure SSH for
secure connections.
Figure 85 Configuration > System > SSH
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Configuration > System > SSH
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches
the IP address(es) in the Se r vice Con t r ol table to access the NWA/WAC CLI using this
service.
Version 1
Select the check box to have the NWA/WAC use both SSH version 1 and version 2
protocols. If you clear the check box, the NWA/WAC uses only SSH version 2 protocol.
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server
Certificate
Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the NWA/
WAC for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the M y
Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.5.5 Examples of Secure Telnet Using SSH
This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client
program to remotely access the NWA/WAC. The configuration and connection steps are similar for
most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
142
Chapter 12 System
12.5.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows
This section describes how to access the NWA/WAC using the Secure Shell Client program.
Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the
NWA/WAC.
Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 1.
A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Ye s to continue.
Figure 86 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key
Enter the password to log in to the NWA/WAC. The CLI screen displays next.
12.5.5.2 Example 2: Linux
This section describes how to access the NWA/WAC using the OpenSSH client program that comes
with most Linux distributions.
Test whether the SSH service is available on the NWA/WAC.
Enter “telnet 192.168.1.2 22” at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer
attempts to connect to port 22 on the NWA/WAC (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.2).
A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the NWA/WAC.
Figure 87 SSH Example 2: Test
$ telnet 192.168.1.2 22
Trying 192.168.1.2...
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
Escape character is '^]'.
SSH-1.5-1.0.0
Enter “ssh –1 192.168.1.2”. This command forces your computer to connect to the NWA/WAC
using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the NWA/WAC using SSH, a
message displays prompting you to save the host information of the NWA/WAC. Type “yes” and
press [ENTER].
Then enter the password to log in to the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
143
Chapter 12 System
Figure 88 SSH Example 2: Log in
$ ssh –1 192.168.1.2
The authenticity of host '192.168.1.2 (192.168.1.2)' can't be established.
RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.2' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts.
Administrator@192.168.1.2's password:
The CLI screen displays next.
12.6 Telnet
You can use Telnet to access the NWA/WAC’s command line interface. Click Con figu r a t ion >
Syst e m > TELN ET to configure your NWA/WAC for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to enable
or disable Telnet and set the server port number.
Figure 89 Configuration > System > TELNET
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Configuration > System > TELNET
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches
the IP address(es) in the Se r vice Con t r ol table to access the NWA/WAC CLI using this
service.
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.7 FTP
You can upload and download the NWA/WAC’s firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use
this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. See Chapter 14 on page 162 for more
information about firmware and configuration files.
To change your NWA/WAC’s FTP settings, click Con figu r a t ion > Syst e m > FTP tab. The screen
appears as shown. Use this screen to specify FTP settings.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
144
Chapter 12 System
Figure 90 Configuration > System > FTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Configuration > System > FTP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches
the IP address(es) in the Se r vice Con t r ol table to access the NWA/WAC using this service.
TLS required
Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt
communication.
This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers.
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server
Certificate
Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the NWA/
WAC for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the M y
Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.8 SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your NWA/WAC supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a
manager station to manage and monitor the NWA/WAC through the network. The NWA/WAC
supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1), version two (SNMPv2c), and version three (SNMPv3). The
next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
145
Chapter 12 System
Figure 91 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the NWA/WAC). An
agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an
agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
12.8.1 Supported MIBs
The NWA/WAC supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The NWA/WAC also
supports private MIBs (ZYXEL-ES-CAPWAP.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-COMMON.MIB, ZYXEL-ESZyXELAPMgmt.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-PROWLAN.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-RFMGMT.MIB, ZYXEL-ES-SMI.MIB, and
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
146
Chapter 12 System
ZYXEL-ES-WIRELESS.MIB) to collect information about CPU and memory usage and VPN total
throughput. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status
and performance. You can download the NWA/WAC’s MIBs from www.zyxel.com.
12.8.2 SNMP Traps
The NWA/WAC will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs.
Table 70 SNMP Traps
OBJECT LABEL
OBJECT ID
DESCRIPTION
linkDown
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3
This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.
linkUp
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.
authenticationFailure
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from nonauthenticated hosts.
12.8.3 Configuring SNMP
To change your NWA/WAC’s SNMP settings, click Configur a t ion > Syst e m > SN M P tab. The
screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings. You can also configure
user profiles that define allowed SNMPv3 access.
Figure 92 Configuration > System > SNMP
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
147
Chapter 12 System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Configuration > System > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Select the check box to allow or disallow users to access the NWA/WAC using SNMP.
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use
the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Trap
Community
Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager. The default is public and allows all requests.
Destination
Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
SNMPv2c
Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv2c to access the NWA/WAC.
Get Community
Enter the Ge t Com m un it y, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext
requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community
Enter the Se t com m u n it y, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station. The default is private and allows all requests.
SNMPv3
Select this to allow SNMP managers using SNMPv3 to access the NWA/WAC.
Add
Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after
the selected entry.
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entry’s settings.
Remove
To remove an entry, select it and click Re m ove . The NWA/WAC confirms you want to
remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take
this action.
This the index number of an SNMPv3 user profile.
User Name
This is the name of the user for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.
Authentication
This field displays the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the
NWA/WAC using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Privacy
This field displays the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the
NWA/WAC using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Privilege
This field displays whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access
to the NWA/WAC using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
12.8.4 Adding or Editing an SNMPv3 User Profile
This screen allows you to add or edit an SNMPv3 user profile. To access this screen, click the
Con figu r a t ion > Syst e m > SN M P screen’s Add button or select a SNMPv3 user profile from the
list and click the Edit button.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
148
Chapter 12 System
Figure 93 Configuration > System > SNMP > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Configuration > System > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Select the user name of the user account for which this SNMPv3 user profile is configured.
Authentication
Select the type of authentication the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the NWA/WAC
using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Select N ON E to not authenticate the SNMPv3 user.
Select M D 5 to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by MD5 for
authentication.
Select SH A to require the SNMPv3 user’s password be encrypted by SHA for
authentication.
Privacy
Select the type of encryption the SNMPv3 user must use to connect to the NWA/WAC
using this SNMPv3 user profile.
Select N ON E to not encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Select D ES to use DES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Select AES to use AES to encrypt the SNMPv3 communications.
Privilege
Select whether the SNMPv3 user can have read-only or read and write access to the NWA/
WAC using this SNMPv3 user profile.
OK
Click OK to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving your changes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
149
C HAPTER
13
Log and Report
13.1 Overview
Use the system screens to configure daily reporting and log settings.
13.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter
• The Em a il D a ily Re por t screen (Section 13.2 on page 150) configures how and where to send
daily reports and what reports to send.
• The Log Se t t in g screens (Section 13.3 on page 152) specify which logs are e-mailed, where
they are e-mailed, and how often they are e-mailed.
13.2 Email Daily Report
Use this screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing
through your NWA/WAC.
Note: Data collection may decrease the NWA/WAC’s traffic throughput rate.
Click Configur a t ion > Log & Re por t > Em a il D a ily Re por t to display the following screen.
Configure this screen to have the NWA/WAC e-mail you system statistics every day.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
150
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Figure 94 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Email
Daily Report
Select this to send reports by e-mail every day.
Mail Server
Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
Mail Subject
Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Select Appe n d syst e m n a m e to add the
NWA/WAC’s system name to the subject. Select Appe n d da t e t im e to add the NWA/WAC’s
system date and time to the subject.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
151
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Table 73 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mail From
Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in
replies.
Mail To
Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
SMTP
Authentication
Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP
server.
User Name
This box is effective when you select the SM TP Au t h e n t ica t ion check box. Type the user
name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password
This box is effective when you select the SM TP Au t h e n t ica t ion check box. Type the
password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Send Report
Now
Click this button to have the NWA/WAC send the daily e-mail report immediately.
Time for
sending report
Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
Report Items
Select the information to include in the report. Select Re se t cou n t e r s a ft e r se n din g
r e por t su cce ssfu lly if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period.
Reset All
Counters
Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NWA/WAC.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
13.3 Log Setting
These screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing
(for example, in the M on it or > Vie w Log screen) or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is emailed immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as
system errors and attacks.
The NWA/WAC provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. The
system log is available on the Vie w Log screen, the e-mail profiles are used to mail log messages
to the specified destinations, and the other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers.
The Log Se t t in g tab also controls what information is saved in each log. For the system log, you
can also specify which log messages are e-mailed, where they are e-mailed, and how often they are
e-mailed.
For alerts, the Log Se t t ing screen controls which events generate alerts and where alerts are emailed.
The Log Se t t in g screen provides a summary of all the settings. You can use the Edit Log Se t t in g
screen to maintain the detailed settings (such as log categories, e-mail addresses, server names,
etc.) for any log. Alternatively, if you want to edit what events is included in each log, you can also
use the Act ive Log Sum m a r y screen to edit this information for all logs at the same time.
13.3.1 Log Setting
To access this screen, click Con figu r a t ion > Log & Re por t > Log Se t t ing.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
152
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Figure 95 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Edit
Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the
entry’s settings.
Activate
To turn on an entry, select it and click Act iva t e .
Inactivate
To turn off an entry, select it and click I n a ct iva t e .
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log.
Status
This field shows whether the log is active or not.
Name
This field displays the name of the log (system log or one of the remote servers).
Log Format
This field displays the format of the log.
I n t e r n a l - system log; you can view the log on the V ie w Log tab.
VRPT/ Syslog - ZyXEL’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.
CEF/ Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Summary
This field is a summary of the settings for each log.
Active Log
Summary
Click this button to open the Act ive Log Su m m a r y screen.
Apply
Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take
effect.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
153
Chapter 13 Log and Report
13.3.2 Edit System Log Settings
This screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail
profiles). Select a system log entry in the Log Se t t in g screen and click the Edit icon.
Figure 96 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
154
Chapter 13 Log and Report
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
E-Mail Server 1/2
Active
Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this
section. You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and
what kinds of log messages are included in alerts in the Act ive Log a n d Ale r t
section.
Mail Server
Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server.
Mail Subject
Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail.
Send From
Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is
used in replies.
Send Log To
Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered.
Send Alerts To
Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered.
Sending Log
Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: W he n Fu ll, H our ly a nd
W h e n Fu ll, D a ily a n d W h e n Fu ll, and W e e k ly a n d W h e n Fu ll.
Day for Sending
Log
This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log
is e-mailed.
Time for Sending
Log
This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day
(hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation.
SMTP
Authentication
Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the
SMTP server.
User Name
This box is effective when you select the SM TP Au t h e n t ica t ion check box. Type the
user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Password
This box is effective when you select the SM TP Au t h e n t ica t ion check box. Type the
password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed.
Active Log and Alert
System log
Use the Syst e m Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log
categories.
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system
log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all
categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled,
the NWA/WAC will e-mail logs to them.
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages,
alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The NWA/WAC does not e-mail
debugging information, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1
Use the E- M a il Se r ve r 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to
e-mail server 1 for all log categories.
Using the Syst e m Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server
1 settings.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to
e-mail server 1.
e n a ble a le r t logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail
server 1.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
155
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Table 75 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit System Log Setting (continued)
LABEL
E-mail Server 2
DESCRIPTION
Use the E- M a il Se r ve r 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to
e-mail server 2 for all log categories.
Using the Syst e m Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server
2 settings.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to
e-mail server 2.
e n a ble a le r t logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail
server 2.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category
This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the
D ispla y and Ca t e gor y fields in the Vie w Log tab. The D e fa ult category includes
debugging messages generated by open source software.
System log
Select which events you want to log by Log Ca t e gor y. There are three choices:
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green checkmark) - create log messages and alerts from this
category
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages,
alerts, and debugging information from this category; the NWA/WAC does not e-mail
debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1
Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when
it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the email settings specified in E- M a il Se r ve r 1 . The NWA/WAC does not e-mail
debugging information, even if it is recorded in the Syst e m log.
E-mail Server 2
Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it
is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the email settings specified in E- M a il Se r ve r 2 . The NWA/WAC does not e-mail
debugging information, even if it is recorded in the Syst e m log.
Log Consolidation
Active
Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log
messages that arrive within the specified Log Con solida t ion I nt e r va l. In the V ie w
Log tab, the text “[count=x]”, where x is the number of original log messages, is
appended at the end of the M e ssa ge field, when multiple log messages were
aggregated.
Log Consolidation
Interval
Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message
appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text
“[count=x]”, where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of
the M e ssa ge field.
OK
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
13.3.3 Edit Remote Server
This screen controls the settings for each log in the remote server (syslog). Select a remote server
entry in the Log Se t t ing screen and click the Edit icon.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
156
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Figure 97 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
157
Chapter 13 Log and Report
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit Remote Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Log Settings for
Remote Server
Active
Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section.
You specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Act ive Log
section.
Log Format
This field displays the format of the log information. It is read-only.
VRPT/ Syslog - ZyXEL’s Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format.
CEF/ Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format.
Server
Address
Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log
information.
Log Facility
Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the
syslog server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information.
Active Log
Selection
Use the Se le ct ion drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and
alerts for all log categories.
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log
messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category
This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the D ispla y and
Ca t e gor y fields in the Vie w Log tab. The D e fa ult category includes debugging messages
generated by open source software.
Selection
Select what information you want to log from each Log Ca t e gor y (except All Logs; see
below). Choices are:
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this
category
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information,
alerts, and debugging information from this category
OK
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
13.3.4 Active Log Summary
This screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, e-mail
profiles, and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for
example, where and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this
screen, go to the Log Se t t in g screen, and click the Act ive Log Sum m a r y button.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
158
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Figure 98 Active Log Summary
This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included
in each log and each alert. (The D e fa ult category includes debugging messages generated by open
source software.)
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
159
Chapter 13 Log and Report
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 77 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active Log
Summary
If the NWA/WAC is set to controller mode, the AC section controls logs generated by the
controller and the AP section controls logs generated by the managed APs.
System log
Use the Syst e m Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories.
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or
e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all
categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the
NWA/WAC will e-mail logs to them.
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts,
and debugging information for all categories. The NWA/WAC does not e-mail debugging
information, even if this setting is selected.
E-mail Server 1
Use the E- M a il Se r ve r 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail
server 1 for all log categories.
Using the Syst e m Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1
settings.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail
server 1.
e n a ble a le r t logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server
1.
E-mail Server 2
Use the E- M a il Se r ve r 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail
server 2 for all log categories.
Using the Syst e m Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2
settings.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail
server 2.
e n a ble a le r t logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server
2.
Remote Server
1~4
For each remote server, use the Se le ct ion drop-down list to change the log settings for all
of the log categories.
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category.
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and
alerts for all log categories.
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log
messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories.
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address.
Log Category
This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the D ispla y and
Ca t e gor y fields in the Vie w Log tab. The D e fa ult category includes debugging messages
generated by open source software.
System log
Select which events you want to log by Log Ca t e gor y. There are three choices:
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green checkmark) - create log messages and alerts from this
category
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts,
and debugging information from this category; the NWA/WAC does not e-mail debugging
information, however, even if this setting is selected.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
160
Chapter 13 Log and Report
Table 77 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Active Log Summary (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
E-mail Server 1
E-mail
Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is
e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail
settings specified in E- M a il Se r ve r 1 . The NWA/WAC does not e-mail debugging
information, even if it is recorded in the Syst e m log.
E-mail Server 2
E-mail
Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is emailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings
specified in E- M a il Se r ve r 2 . The NWA/WAC does not e-mail debugging information, even
if it is recorded in the Syst e m log.
Remote Server
1~4 Syslog
For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Ca t e gor y
(except All Logs; see below). Choices are:
disa ble a ll logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category
e n a ble n or m a l logs (green checkmark) - log regular information and alerts from this
category
e n a ble n or m a l logs a n d de bu g logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information,
alerts, and debugging information from this category
OK
Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
161
C HAPTER
14
File Manager
14.1 Overview
Configuration files define the NWA/WAC’s settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can
store on the NWA/WAC and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a
shell script without the NWA/WAC restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell
script files on the NWA/WAC. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and
upload them to the NWA/WAC. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh
extension.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Configur a t ion File screen (Section 14.2 on page 163) stores and names configuration files.
You can also download and upload configuration files.
• The Fir m w a r e Pa ck a ge screen (Section 14.3 on page 168) checks your current firmware
version and uploads firmware to the NWA/WAC.
• The She ll Scr ipt screen (Section 14.4 on page 170) stores, names, downloads, uploads and runs
shell script files.
14.1.2 What you Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Configuration Files and Shell Scripts
When you apply a configuration file, the NWA/WAC uses the factory default settings for any
features that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the NWA/WAC
only applies the commands that it contains. Other settings do not change.
These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands
manually. An example is shown below
# enter configuration mode
configure terminal
# change administrator password
username admin password 4321 user-type admin
#configure default radio profile, change 2GHz channel to 11 & Tx output power # to
50%
wlan-radio-profile default
2g-channel 11
output-power 50%
exit
write
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
162
Chapter 14 File Manager
While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the NWA/WAC applies
configuration files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below.
Table 78 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the NWA/WAC
Configuration Files (.conf)
Shell Scripts (.zysh)
•
•
•
•
•
Resets to default configuration.
Goes into CLI Con figu r a t ion mode.
Runs the commands in the configuration file.
Goes into CLI Pr ivile ge mode.
Runs the commands in the shell script.
You have to run the aforementioned example as a shell script because the first command is run in
Pr ivile ge mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration
file because the rest of the commands are executed in Con figu r a t ion mode.
Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts
In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to have
the NWA/WAC treat the line as a comment.
Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!” to
have the NWA/WAC exit sub command mode.
Note: “exit” or “!'” must follow sub commands if it is to make the NWA/WAC exit sub
command mode.
In the following example lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 5 exits sub command mode.
! this is from Joe
# on 2010/12/05
wlan-ssid-profile default
ssid Joe-AP
qos wmm
security default
Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts
When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the NWA/WAC processes the file line-byline. The NWA/WAC checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it
continues with the next line. If the NWA/WAC finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file
or shell script and generates a log.
You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-onerror off in the configuration file or shell script. The NWA/WAC ignores any errors in the
configuration file or shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The NWA/WAC still generates
a log for any errors.
14.2 Configuration File
Click M a in t e n a n ce > File M a n a ge r > Configu r a t ion File to open this screen. Use the
Configur a t ion File screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
163
Chapter 14 File Manager
configuration files from the NWA/WAC to your computer and upload configuration files from your
computer to the NWA/WAC.
Once your NWA/WAC is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you
back up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup
configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Configuration File Flow at Restart
• If there is not a st a r t up- config.conf when you restart the NWA/WAC (whether through a
management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the NWA/WAC uses
the syst e m - de fa u lt .conf configuration file with the NWA/WAC’s default settings.
• If there is a st a r t u p- con fig.con f, the NWA/WAC checks it for errors and applies it. If there are
no errors, the NWA/WAC uses it and copies it to the la st good.con f configuration file as a back
up file. If there is an error, the NWA/WAC generates a log and copies the st a r t u p- config.con f
configuration file to the st a r t up- con fig- ba d.con f configuration file and tries the existing
la st good.conf configuration file. If there isn’t a la st good.con f configuration file or it also has
an error, the NWA/WAC applies the syst e m - de fa u lt .con f configuration file.
• You can change the way the st a r t up- config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup
stop-on-error off command. The NWA/WAC ignores any errors in the st a r t u p- con fig.con f
file and applies all of the valid commands. The NWA/WAC still generates a log for any errors.
Figure 99 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File
Do not turn off the NWA/WAC while configuration file upload is in
progress.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
164
Chapter 14 File Manager
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rename
Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the NWA/WAC. You can only
rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the la st good.con f,
syst e m - de fa u lt .con f and st a r t u p- con fig.con f files.
You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the
NWA/WAC.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Re n a m e to open the Re n a m e File
screen.
Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zAZ0-9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without saving a
duplicate of the configuration file.
Remove
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Re m ove to delete it from the NWA/
WAC. You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the
syst e m - de fa u lt .con f, st a r t u p- con fig.con f and la st good.con f files.
A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click
OK to delete the configuration file or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without deleting the
configuration file.
Download
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click D ow n loa d to save the configuration to
your computer.
Copy
Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the NWA/WAC.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.
Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zAZ0-9;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without saving a
duplicate of the configuration file.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
165
Chapter 14 File Manager
Table 79 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Use this button to have the NWA/WAC use a specific configuration file.
Click a configuration file’s row to select it and click Apply to have the NWA/WAC use that
configuration file. The NWA/WAC does not have to restart in order to use a different
configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system
reconfigures.
The following screen gives you options for what the NWA/WAC is to do if it encounters an
error in the configuration file.
I m m e dia t e ly st op a pplyin g t he con figu r a t ion file - this is not recommended because
it would leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured
before the first error, the console port may be the only way to access the device.
I m m e dia t e ly st op a pplyin g t he con figu r a t ion file a n d r oll ba ck t o t h e pr e viou s
configur a t ion - this gets the NWA/WAC started with a fully valid configuration file as
quickly as possible.
I gn or e e r r or s a n d fin ish a pplyin g t h e con figu r a t ion file - this applies the valid parts
of the configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration file’s errors.
This lets the NWA/WAC apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for
what to fix.
I gn or e e r r or s a n d fin ish a pplyin g t h e con figu r a t ion file a n d t h e n r oll ba ck t o t h e
pr e viou s con figu r a t ion - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates
error logs for all of the configuration file’s errors, and starts the NWA/WAC with a fully valid
configuration file.
Click OK to have the NWA/WAC start applying the configuration file or click Ca nce l to close
the screen
This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential
value, and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration
files that you can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available
flash storage space.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
166
Chapter 14 File Manager
Table 79 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Name
This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file.
You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names.
The syst e m - de fa u lt .con f file contains the NWA/WAC’s default settings. Select this file
and click Apply to reset all of the NWA/WAC settings to the factory defaults. This
configuration file is included when you upload a firmware package.
The st a r t u p- con fig.con f file is the configuration file that the NWA/WAC is currently using.
If you make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied
to this configuration file. The NWA/WAC applies configuration changes made in the Web
Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration
changes made via commands when you use the write command.
The la st good.con f is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when
the device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can
apply lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration.
Size
This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file.
Last Modified
This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last
changed or saved.
Upload
Configuration
File
The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration
file from your computer to your NWA/WAC
You cannot upload a configuration file named syst e m - de fa u lt .con f or la st good.conf.
If you upload st a r t u p- con fig.con f, it will replace the current configuration and
immediately apply the new settings.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to find it.
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a
“.conf” filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a fie of a
different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you
can upload them.
Upload
Click Uploa d to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
14.2.1 Example of Configuration File Download Using FTP
The following example gets a configuration file named startup-config.conf from the NWA/WAC and
saves it on the computer.
Connect your computer to the NWA/WAC.
The FTP server IP address of the NWA/WAC in standalone AP mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your
computer to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.
Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the NWA/WAC. For example, in the Windows
command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see
when the firmware recovery finishes.
Enter your user name when prompted.
Enter your password as requested.
Use “cd” to change to the directory that contains the files you want to download.
Use “dir” or “ls” if you need to display a list of the files in the directory.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
167
Chapter 14 File Manager
Use "get” to download files. Transfer the configuration file on the NWA/WAC to your computer. Type
get followed by the name of the configuration file. This examples uses get startup-config.conf.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ---------220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.
220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.
220-This is a private system - No anonymous login
220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.
User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin
331 User admin OK. Password required
Password:
230 OK. Current restricted directory is /
ftp> cd conf
250 OK. Current directory is /conf
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful
150 Connecting to port 5001
lastgood.conf
startup-config.conf
system-default.conf
226 3 matches total
ftp: 57 bytes received in 0.33Seconds 0.17Kbytes/sec.
ftp> get startup-config.conf
200 PORT command successful
150 Connecting to port 5002
226-File successfully transferred
226 0.002 seconds (measured here), 1.66 Mbytes per second
ftp: 2928 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 183.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
Wait for the file transfer to complete.
10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.
14.3 Firmware Package
Click M a in t e na n ce > File M a n a ge r > Fir m w a r e Pa ck a ge to open this screen. Use the
Fir m w a r e Pa ck a ge screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the
NWA/WAC.
Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You
only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware.
See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the
firmware and how to recover it.
Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses a .bin extension.
The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset
the NWA/WAC while the firmware update is in progress!
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
168
Chapter 14 File Manager
Figure 100 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Boot
Module
This is the version of the boot module that is currently on the NWA/WAC.
Current
Version
This is the firmware version and the date created.
Released
Date
This is the date that the version of the firmware was created.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to find it.
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click Uploa d to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
After you see the Fir m w a r e Uploa d in Pr oce ss screen, wait two minutes before logging into the
NWA/WAC again.
Note: The NWA/WAC automatically reboots after a successful upload.
The NWA/WAC automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating
systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 101 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the D a shboa r d screen.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
169
Chapter 14 File Manager
14.3.1 Example of Firmware Upload Using FTP
This procedure requires the NWA/WAC’s firmware. Download the firmware package from
www.zyxel.com and unzip it. The firmware file uses a .bin extension, for example,
"420AAHY1C0.bin". Do the following after you have obtained the firmware file.
Connect your computer to the NWA/WAC.
The FTP server IP address of the NWA/WAC in standalone AP mode is 192.168.1.2, so set your
computer to use a static IP address from 192.168.1.3 ~192.168.1.254.
Use an FTP client on your computer to connect to the NWA/WAC. For example, in the Windows
command prompt, type ftp 192.168.1.2. Keep the console session connected in order to see
when the firmware recovery finishes.
Enter your user name when prompted.
Enter your password as requested.
Enter “hash” for FTP to print a `#' character for every 1024 bytes of data you upload so that you
can watch the file transfer progress.
Enter “bin” to set the transfer mode to binary.
Transfer the firmware file from your computer to the NWA/WAC. Type put followed by the path and
name of the firmware file. This examples uses put C:\ftproot\NWA/WAC_FW\420AAHY1C0.bin.
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.2
Connected to 192.168.1.2.
220---------- Welcome to Pure-FTPd [privsep] [TLS] ---------220-You are user number 1 of 5 allowed.
220-Local time is now 21:28. Server port: 21.
220-This is a private system - No anonymous login
220 You will be disconnected after 600 minutes of inactivity.
User (192.168.1.2:(none)): admin
331 User admin OK. Password required
Password:
230 OK. Current restricted directory is /
ftp> hash
Hash mark printing On ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .
ftp> bin
200 TYPE is now 8-bit binary
ftp> put C:\ftproot\NWA/WAC_FW\420AAHY1C0.bin
Wait for the file transfer to complete.
10 Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.
14.4 Shell Script
Use shell script files to have the NWA/WAC use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to
create the shell script files. They must use a “.zysh” filename extension.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
170
Chapter 14 File Manager
Click M a in t e n a n ce > File M a n a ge r > Sh e ll Scr ipt to open this screen. Use the She ll Scr ipt
screen to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell
script files on the NWA/WAC at the same time.
Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write
command, the changes will be lost when the NWA/WAC restarts. You could use
multiple write commands in a long script.
Figure 102 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 81 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rename
Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the NWA/WAC.
You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the NWA/WAC.
Click a shell script’s row to select it and click Re n a m e to open the Re n a m e File screen.
Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z09;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without saving a duplicate of
the configuration file.
Remove
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click D e le t e to delete the shell script file from the
NWA/WAC.
A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to
delete the shell script file or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without deleting the shell script
file.
Download
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click D ow n loa d to save the configuration to your
computer.
Copy
Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the NWA/WAC.
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen.
Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z09;‘~!@#$%^&()_+[]{}’,.=-).
Click OK to save the duplicate or click Ca n ce l to close the screen without saving a duplicate of
the configuration file.
Run
Use this button to have the NWA/WAC use a specific shell script file.
Click a shell script file’s row to select it and click Ru n to have the NWA/WAC use that shell script
file. You may need to wait awhile for the NWA/WAC to finish applying the commands.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
171
Chapter 14 File Manager
Table 81 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This column displays the number for each shell script file entry.
File Name
This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file.
Size
This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file.
Last
Modified
This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or
saved.
Upload Shell
Script
The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file
from your computer to your NWA/WAC.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to find it.
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... to find the .zysh file you want to upload.
Upload
Click Uploa d to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
172
C HAPTER
15
Diagnostics
15.1 Overview
Use the diagnostics screen for troubleshooting.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The D ia gnost ics screen (Section 15.2 on page 173) generates a file containing the NWA/WAC’s
configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during
troubleshooting.
15.2 Diagnostics
This screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the NWA/WAC’s configuration
and diagnostic information. You may need to generate this file and send it to customer support
during troubleshooting.
Click M a in t e n a n ce > D ia gn ost ics to open the D ia gnost ic screen.
Figure 103 Maintenance > Diagnostics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Maintenance > Diagnostics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Filename
This is the name of the most recently created diagnostic file.
Last modified
This is the date and time that the last diagnostic file was created. The format is yyyymm-dd hh:mm:ss.
Size
This is the size of the most recently created diagnostic file.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
173
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Table 82 Maintenance > Diagnostics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Collect Now
Click this to have the NWA/WAC create a new diagnostic file.
Download
Click this to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
174
C HAPTER
16
LEDs
16.1 Overview
The LEDs of your NWA/WAC can be controlled such that they stay lit (ON) or OFF after the NWA/
WAC is ready. There are two features that controls the LEDs of your NWA/WAC - Loca t or and
Su ppr e ssion .
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Su ppr e ssion screen (Section 16.2 on page 175)) allows you to set how you want the LEDs
to behave after the device is ready.
• The Loca t or screen (Section 16.3 on page 176) allows users to see the actual location of the
NWA/WAC between several devices in the network.
16.2 Suppression Screen
The LED Suppression feature allows you to control how the LEDs of your NWA/WAC behave after
it’s ready. The deafult LED suppression setting of your AP is different depending on your NWA/WAC
model.
You can go to M a int e na nce > LED s > Suppr e ssion screen to see the default of the LED behavior.
If the Suppr e ssion On check box is checked, it means the LEDs of your NWA/WAC will t ur n off
after it’s ready. On the other hand, if the check box is unchecked, it means the LEDs will st a y lit
after the AP is ready.
You can change the LED suppression setting in the M a int e na nce > LED s > Suppr e ssion screen.
After you make changes in the suppression screen, it will be stored as the default when the NWA/
WAC is restarted. See (Section 1.6 on page 20) for information on default values for different
models.
Note: When the NWA/WAC is booting or performing firmware upgrade, the LEDs will lit
regardless of the setting in LED suppression.
To access this screen, click M a int e na nce > LED s > Suppr e ssion.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
175
Chapter 16 LEDs
Figure 104 Maintenance > LEDs > Suppression
16.3 Locator Screen
The Locator feature identifies the location of your WAC among several devices in the network. You
can run this feature and set a timer in this screen.
To run the locator feature, enter a number of minutes and click Tur n On button to have the WAC
find its location. The Locator LED will start to blink for the number of minutes set in the Loca t or
screen. The default setting is 10 minutes. While the locator is running, the turn on button will grey
out and return after it’s finished. If you make changes to the time default setting, it will be stored
as the defualt when the WAC restarts.
Note: Th e Loca t or feature is not affected by the Suppression setting.
To access this screen, click M a int e na nce > LED s > Loca t or.
Figure 105 Maintenance > LEDs > Locator
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
176
Chapter 16 LEDs
The following table describes fields in the above screen.
Table 83 Maintenance > LED > Locator
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Turn On
Click Tu r n On button to activate the locator. The Locator function will show the
actual location of the WAC between several devices in the network.
Automatically extinguish
after
Enter a time interval between 1 and 60 minutes to stop the locator LED from
blinking. Default is 10 minutes.
Apply
Click Apply to save changes in this screen.
Reset
Click Re se t to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
177
C HAPTER
17
Reboot
17.1 Overview
Use this screen to restart the device.
17.1.1 What You Need To Know
If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change
when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to
save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot.
Reboot is different to reset; reset returns the device to its default configuration.
17.2 Reboot
This screen allows remote users can restart the device. To access this screen, click M a int e na nce >
Re boot .
Figure 106 Maintenance > Reboot
Click the Re boot button to restart the NWA/WAC. Wait a few minutes until the login screen
appears. If the login screen does not appear, type the IP address of the device in your Web browser.
You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
178
C HAPTER
18
Shutdown
18.1 Overview
Use this screen to shutdown the device.
Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown
command before you turn off the NWA/WAC or remove the power. Not
doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt.
18.1.1 What You Need To Know
Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. Shutdown is
different to reset; reset returns the device to its default configuration.
18.2 Shutdown
To access this screen, click M a int e na nce > Shut dow n.
Figure 107 Maintenance > Shutdown
Click the Shut dow n button to shut down the NWA/WAC. Wait for the device to shut down before
you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power.
You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shutdown the NWA/WAC.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
179
C HAPTER
19
Troubleshooting
19.1 Overview
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LED
• NWA/WAC Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Wireless Connections
• Resetting the NWA/WAC
19.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LED
The NWA/WAC does not turn on. The LED is not on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor included with the NWA/WAC or a PoE power injector.
Make sure the power adaptor or PoE power injector is connected to the NWA/WAC and plugged in to
an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
If none of these steps work, you may have faulty hardware and should contact your NWA/WAC
vendor.
The LED does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.6 on page 20.
Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
180
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector to the NWA/WAC.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
19.3 NWA/WAC Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the NWA/WAC.
The default IP address (in standalone AP mode) is 192.168.1.2.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you have to reset the device to its factory
defaults. See Section 19.6 on page 187.
If your NWA/WAC is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This
information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network.
Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more
information.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address (in standalone AP mode) is 192.168.1.2.
• If you changed the IP address, use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the NWA/WAC.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 20.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NWA/WAC. (If you know that there are
routers between your computer and the NWA/WAC, skip this step.)
• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP
address.
• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP address is in the
same subnet as the NWA/WAC.
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NWA/WAC with the default IP address.
See Section 19.6 on page 187.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
181
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
Adva n ce d Sugge st ions
• Try to access the NWA/WAC using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NWA/
WAC, check the remote management settings to find out why the NWA/WAC does not respond to
HTTP.
• If your computer is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN /ETH ERN ET
port.
I forgot the password.
The default password is 1 2 3 4 .
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 19.6 on page
187.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NWA/WAC.
Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default password is 1 2 3 4 .
This fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NWA/WAC.
Log out of the NWA/WAC in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or PoE power injector to the NWA/WAC.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 19.6 on page
187.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
19.4 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
182
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 19.2 on page 180.
Make sure the NWA/WAC is connected to a broadband modem or router with Internet access and
your computer is set to obtain an dynamic IP address.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings on the wireless
client are the same as the settings on the NWA/WAC.
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NWA/WAC), but
my Internet connection is not available anymore.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LED is behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 1.6 on page 20.
Reboot the NWA/WAC.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LED, and check Section 1.6 on page 20.
If the NWA/WAC is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the
Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
Check the signal strength. If the signal is weak, try moving the NWA/WAC closer to the NWA/WAC
(if possible), and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the
wireless network (microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
Reboot the NWA/WAC.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Adva n ce d Sugge st ions
Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled,
you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
183
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
19.5 Wireless Connections
I cannot access the NWA/WAC or ping any computer from the WLAN.
Make sure the wireless LAN (wireless radio) is enabled on the NWA/WAC.
Make sure the radio or at least one of the NWA/WAC’s radios is operating in AP mode.
Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is working properly.
Make sure the wireless adapter (installed on your computer) is IEEE 802.11 compatible and
supports the same wireless standard as the NWA/WAC’s active radio.
Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the
NWA/WAC.
Check that both the NWA/WAC and your computer are using the same wireless and wireless
security settings.
Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN.
WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available
software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the
strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2PSK is recommended.
The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified.
If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS
server has priority. Change the RADIUS server’s configuration if you need to use a different reauthentication timer setting.
I cannot get a certificate to import into the NWA/WAC.
For M y Ce r t ifica t e s, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification
request that was generated by the NWA/WAC. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format,
including the certificate’s public and private keys.
You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the certificate.
Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
184
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters,
uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital
signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The
private key is not included. The NWA/WAC currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that
contains a single certificate.
• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase
letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable
form.
• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The
private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not
connected to your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this
and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the NWA/WAC.
Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy
for this to occur since many programs use text files by default.
I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing.
When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically
overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first.
The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly.
• In a configuration file or shell script, use “#” or “!” as the first character of a command line to
have the NWA/WAC treat the line as a comment.
• Your configuration files or shell scripts can use “exit” or a command line consisting of a single “!”
to have the NWA/WAC exit sub command mode.
• Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the NWA/WAC
restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script.
Note: “exit” or “!'” must follow sub commands if it is to make the NWA/WAC exit sub
command mode.
I cannot get the firmware uploaded using the commands.
The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use
the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for
how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it.
Wireless clients are not being load balanced among my APs.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
185
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
• Make sure that all the APs used by the wireless clients in question share the same SSID, security,
and radio settings.
• Make sure that all the APs are in the same broadcast domain.
• Make sure that the wireless clients are in range of the other APs; if they are only in range of a
single AP, then load balancing may not be as effective.
In the M on it or > W ir e le ss > AP I n for m a t ion > Ra dio List screen, there is no load
balancing indicator associated with any APs assigned to the load balancing task.
• Check to be sure that the AP profile which contains the load balancing settings is correctly
assigned to the APs in question.
• The load balancing task may have been terminated because further load balancing on the APs in
question is no longer required.
How do I remove the WAC from its mounting bracket?
• Find the down arrow close to the Ethernet ports, then use a thin flat tool (for example, a flat
screw driver) to lift up a clip beneath the down arrow.
• Turn the WAC counter-clockwise.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
186
Chapter 19 Troubleshooting
• Detach the WAC from the mounting bracket.
19.6 Resetting the NWA/WAC
If you cannot access the NWA/WAC by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and
then on again. If you still cannot access the NWA/WAC by any method or you forget the
administrator password(s), you can reset the NWA/WAC to its factory-default settings. Any
configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the NWA/WAC should still be available
afterwards.
Use the following procedure to reset the NWA/WAC to its factory-default settings. This overwrites
the settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file.
Note: This procedure removes the current configuration.
Make sure the Power LED is on and not blinking.
Press the RESET button and hold it until the Power LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about
ten seconds.)
Release the RESET button, and wait for the NWA/WAC to restart.
You should be able to access the NWA/WAC using the default settings.
19.7 Getting More Troubleshooting Help
Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting
suggestions.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
187
A PPENDIX
Importing Certificates
This appendix shows you how to import public key certificates into your web browser.
Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate.
When a certificate authority such as VeriSign, Comodo, or Network Solutions, to name a few,
receives a certificate request from a website operator, they confirm that the web domain and
contact information in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar. If
they match, then the certificate is issued to the website operator, who then places it on the site to
be issued to all visiting web browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate.
Many ZyXEL products, such as the NWA/WAC, issue their own public key certificates. These can be
used by web browsers on a LAN or WAN to verify that they are in fact connecting to the legitimate
device and not one masquerading as it. However, because the certificates were not issued by one of
the several organizations officially recognized by the most common web browsers, you will need to
import the ZyXEL-created certificate into your web browser and flag that certificate as a trusted
authority.
Note: You can see if you are browsing on a secure website if the URL in your web
browser’s address bar begins with https:// or there is a sealed padlock icon
) somewhere in the main browser window (not all browsers show the padlock
in the same location).
Internet Explorer
The following example uses Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 on Windows XP Professional; however,
they can also apply to Internet Explorer on Windows Vista.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
188
Appendix A Importing Certificates
If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it
you are presented with a certification error.
Click Cont inue t o t his w e bsit e ( not r e com m e nde d) .
In the Addr e ss Ba r, click Ce r t ifica t e Er r or > Vie w ce r t ifica t e s.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
189
Appendix A Importing Certificates
In the Ce r t ifica t e dialog box, click I n st a ll Ce r t ifica t e.
In the Ce r t ifica t e I m por t W iza r d, click N e x t .
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
190
Appendix A Importing Certificates
If you want Internet Explorer to Aut om a t ica lly se le ct ce r t ifica t e st or e ba se d on t he t ype of
ce r t ifica t e , click N e x t again and then go to step 9.
Otherwise, select Pla ce a ll ce r t ifica t e s in t he follow ing st or e and then click Br ow se .
In the Se le ct Ce r t ifica t e St or e dialog box, choose a location in which to save the certificate and
then click OK.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
191
Appendix A Importing Certificates
In the Com ple t ing t he Ce r t ifica t e I m por t W iza r d screen, click Finish .
10 If you are presented with another Se cur it y W a r ning, click Ye s.
11 Finally, click OK when presented with the successful certificate installation message.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
192
Appendix A Importing Certificates
12 The next time you start Internet Explorer and go to a ZyXEL Web Configurator page, a sealed
padlock icon appears in the address bar. Click it to view the page’s W e bsit e I de nt ifica t ion
information.
Installing a Stand-Alone Certificate File in Internet Explorer
Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public key certificate when
prompted, you can install a stand-alone certificate file if one has been issued to you.
Double-click the public key certificate file.
In the security warning dialog box, click Ope n .
Refer to steps 4-12 in the Internet Explorer procedure beginning on page 188 to complete the
installation process.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
193
Appendix A Importing Certificates
Removing a Certificate in Internet Explorer
This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Internet Explorer 7 on Windows XP.
Open I nt e r ne t Ex plor e r and click Tools > I nt e r ne t Opt ions.
In the I n t e r n e t Opt ion s dialog box, click Cont e nt > Ce r t ifica t e s.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
194
Appendix A Importing Certificates
In the Ce r t ifica t e s dialog box, click the Tr ust e d Root Ce r t ifica t e s Aut hor it ie s tab, select the
certificate that you want to delete, and then click Re m ove .
In the Ce r t ifica t e s confirmation, click Ye s.
In the Root Ce r t ifica t e St or e dialog box, click Ye s.
The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed, a
certification error appears.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
195
Appendix A Importing Certificates
Firefox
The following example uses Mozilla Firefox 2 on Windows XP Professional; however, the screens can
also apply to Firefox 2 on all platforms.
If your device’s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification, then the first time you browse to it
you are presented with a certification error.
Select Acce pt t his ce r t ifica t e pe r m a ne nt ly and click OK.
The certificate is stored and you can now connect securely to the Web Configurator. A sealed
padlock appears in the address bar, which you can click to open the Pa ge I nfo > Se cur it y window
to view the web page’s security information.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
196
Appendix A Importing Certificates
Installing a Stand-Alone Certificate File in Firefox
Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public key certificate when
prompted, you can install a stand-alone certificate file if one has been issued to you.
Open Fir e fox and click Tools > Opt ion s.
In the Opt ions dialog box, click Adva nce d > Encr ypt ion > Vie w Ce r t ifica t e s.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
197
Appendix A Importing Certificates
In the Ce r t ifica t e M a n a ge r dialog box, click W e b Sit e s > I m por t .
Use the Se le ct File dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Ope n .
The next time you visit the web site, click the padlock in the address bar to open the Pa ge I n fo >
Se cur it y window to see the web page’s security information.
Removing a Certificate in Firefox
This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Firefox 2.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
198
Appendix A Importing Certificates
Open Fir e fox and click Tools > Opt ion s.
In the Opt ions dialog box, click Adva nce d > Encr ypt ion > Vie w Ce r t ifica t e s.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
199
Appendix A Importing Certificates
In the Ce r t ifica t e M a n a ge r dialog box, select the W e b Sit e s tab, select the certificate that you
want to remove, and then click D e le t e .
In the D e le t e W e b Sit e Ce r t ifica t e s dialog box, click OK.
The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed, a
certification error appears.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
200
A PPENDIX
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 84 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10
Interface ID
10 bits
54 bits
64 bits
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
201
Appendix B IPv6
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
Table 85 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3
All DHCP severs on a local site.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 86 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
202
Appendix B IPv6
Table 86 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
Table 87
00
: 13
: 49
: 12
: 34
: 56
: 13
: 49
: FF
: FE
: 12
: 34
M AC
Table 88
EUI - 6 4
02
: 56
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP
server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own
Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the NWA/WAC is set to
automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 1another
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
203
Appendix B IPv6
address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the
router. This is a routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol
that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other
configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages
using UDP.
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC
address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with
the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1 ) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2 ). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
T2
T1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Rebind
to S2
Rebind
to S2
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a wellknown multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
1.
In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
204
Appendix B IPv6
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The NWA/WAC uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the NWA/WAC passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The
hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)
The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.
• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The NWA/WAC maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the NWA/WAC configures a link-local address automatically, and then
sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the NWA/WAC also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the NWA/
WAC receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in
the neighbor cache. When the NWA/WAC uses a router solicitation message to query for a router
and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor
cache, prefix list and destination cache. The NWA/WAC creates an entry in the default router list
cache if the router can be used as a default router.
When the NWA/WAC needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the
next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the NWA/WAC uses the prefix list
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
205
Appendix B IPv6
to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without
passing through a router. If the address is onlink, the address is considered as the next hop.
Otherwise, the NWA/WAC determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table.
Once the next hop IP address is known, the NWA/WAC looks into the neighbor cache to get the linklayer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the NWA/WAC cannot find an
entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address
resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
206
Appendix B IPv6
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
IP Address. . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
. .
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
10.1.1.46
255.255.255.0
fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
10.1.1.254
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
After the installation is complete, select St a r t > All Pr ogr a m s > D ibble r - D H CPv6 > Clie nt
I nst a ll a s se r vice .
Select St a r t > Cont r ol Pa n e l > Adm in ist r a t ive Tools > Se r vice s.
Double click D ibble r - a D H CPv6 clie nt .
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
207
Appendix B IPv6
Click St a r t and then OK.
Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
Select Cont r ol Pa ne l > N e t w or k a n d Sh a r in g Ce n t e r > Loca l Ar e a Con ne ct ion.
Select the I n t e r n e t Pr ot ocol Ve r sion 6 ( TCP/ I Pv6 ) checkbox to enable it.
Click OK to save the change.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
208
Appendix B IPv6
Click Close to exit the Loca l Ar e a Conn e ct ion St a t us screen.
Select St a r t > All Pr ogr a m s > Acce ssor ie s > Com m a nd Pr om pt .
Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS
IPv6 Address. . . . . .
Link-local IPv6 Address
IPv4 Address. . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . .
Default Gateway . . . .
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
2001:b021:2d::1000
fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
172.16.100.61
255.255.255.0
fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
209
A PPENDIX
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device. Regional websites are listed below.
See also ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com / about _zyxel/ zyxel_worldwide.sht m l.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
• ZyXEL Kazakhstan
• http://www.zyxel.kz
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
210
Appendix C Customer Support
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philipines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
211
Appendix C Customer Support
Belarus
• ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Bulgaria
• ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
• ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
• ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
Latvia
• ZyXEL Latvia
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
212
Appendix C Customer Support
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
• ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
• ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
• ZyXEL Spain
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
• Studerus AG
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
213
Appendix C Customer Support
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Turkey
• ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
• ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Ecuador
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Egypt
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.us.zyxel.com/
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
214
Appendix C Customer Support
Oceania
Australia
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
215
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2015 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Your use of the NWA/WAC is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers.
Trademarks
Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
UNITED STATE AMERICA
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
FCC EMC Statement
•
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment or devices.
Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver's.
Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
•
•
•
•
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This transmitter must be at least 22 cm or 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Country Code selection feature to be disabled for products marketed to the US/CANADA
Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only. (WAC6553D-E is a device for outdoor use.)
CANADA
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
216
Appendix D Legal Information
Industry Canada ICES statement
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-210 statement
•
•
•
•
•
•
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain
approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain
should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful
communication.
This radio transmitter (2468C-WAC6502D-E (WAC6502D-S, WAC6502D-E), 2468C-WAC6503D-S (WAC6503D-S), 2468C-WAC6553D-E
(WAC6553D-E)) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible
gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater
than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un
gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope
rayonnée quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépassepas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
Le présent émetteur radio (2468C-WAC6502D-E (WAC6502D-S, WAC6502D-E), 2468C-WAC6503D-S (WAC6503D-S), 2468CWAC6553D-E (WAC6553D-E)) de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorieI) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour
fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque
type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont
strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
ANTENNA MODEL
TYPE
CONNECTOR
2.4 G GAIN
5 G GAIN
WAC6502D-E
dipole
RSMA
WAC6502D-S
dipole
IPEX
WAC6503D-S
dipole
IPEX
ZXL04-22008A
dipole
N type
4.5
Industry Canada radiation exposure statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 22 cm or 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 22 cm ou 30 cm (WAC6553D-E) de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre
corps.
Caution:
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit;
and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for pointto-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz
and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(v) WAC6553D-E is an outdoor device and only uses 5G Band 4 (5725-5850 MHz).
Avertissement:
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire les
risques de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer à la
limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal d’antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-5825 MHz) doit se conformer à la limite de p.i.r.e.
spécifiée pour l’exploitation point à point et non point à point, selon le cas.
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi être avisés que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont désignés utilisateurs
principaux (c.-à-d., qu’ils ont la priorité) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du
brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(v) WAC6553D-E est un appareil exterieur et seulement utilise 5G Bane 4 (5725-5850 MHz).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
217
Appendix D Legal Information
EUROPEAN UNION
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 1999/
5/EC (R&TTE).
Б
(Bulgarian)
С
Español
(Spanish)
Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Čeština
(Czech)
ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/EC.
Dansk (Danish)
Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
(German)
Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
Eesti keel
(Estonian)
Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Ε η ά
(Greek)
я
Ε Η
Ε
ZyXEL
Α
ΧΕ
,ч
Α ZyXEL ∆Η Ω Ε
Ε ∆ Α Α Ε
Η
я
1999/5/ C.
ε π σ ός
∆ΗΓ Α 1999/5/ΕC.
ΦΩ Ε Α
Ω∆Ε
Α Α
Η Ε
Α
English
Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Français
(French)
Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
Hrvatski
(Croatian)
ZyXEL ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 1999/5/EC.
Íslenska
(Icelandic)
Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar
1999/5/EC.
Italiano
(Italian)
Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviešu valoda
(Latvian)
Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lietuvių kalba
(Lithuanian)
Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar
(Hungarian)
Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK
irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti (Maltese)
Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li
hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands
(Dutch)
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
Polski (Polish)
Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
(Portuguese)
ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/EC.
Română
(Romanian)
Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
Slovenčina
(Slovak)
ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.
Slovenščina
(Slovene)
ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/EC.
Suomi
(Finnish)
ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
218
Appendix D Legal Information
Svenska
(Swedish)
Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Norsk
(Norwegian)
Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante
bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
National Restrictions
This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation except for
the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 2014/53/UE) sans aucune
limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttiva 2014/53/UE) senza nessuna limitazione,
eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU
folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless
local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements
or both are applicable.
The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their
national regulations for both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs.
The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulat ory
Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs”:.
Belgium
The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range
exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch
Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des
services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.
Denmark
In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.
I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
Italy
This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless
this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please
check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in
Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”.
Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latvia
The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details.
2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://
www.esd.lv.
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in
those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding
the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
219
Appendix D Legal Information
List of national codes
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria
AT
Liechtenstein
LI
Belgium
BE
Lithuania
LT
Bulgaria
BG
Luxembourg
LU
Croatia
HR
Malta
MT
Cyprus
CY
Netherlands
NL
Czech Republic
CR
Norway
NO
Denmark
DK
Poland
PL
Estonia
EE
Portugal
PT
Finland
FI
Romania
RO
France
FR
Serbia
RS
Germany
DE
Slovakia
SK
Greece
GR
Slovenia
SI
Hungary
HU
Spain
ES
Iceland
IS
Sweden
SE
Ireland
IE
Switzerland
CH
Italy
IT
Turkey
TR
Latvia
LV
United Kingdom
GB
Professional installation instruction (WAC6553D-E)
Please be advised that due to the unique function supplied by this product, the device is intended for use with our interactive
entertainment software and licensed third-party only. The product will be distributed through controlled distribution channel and installed
by trained professional and will not be sold directly to the general public through retail store.
Installation personal
This product is designed for specific application and needs to be installed by a qualified personal who has RF and related rule knowledge.
The general user shall not attempt to install or change the setting.
Installation location
The product shall be installed at a location where the radiating antenna can be kept 30 cm from nearby person in normal operation
condition to meet regulatory RF exposure requirement.
External antenna
Use only the antennas which have been approved by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The non-approved antenna(s) may produce
unwanted spurious or excessive RF transmitting power which may lead to the violation of FCC/IC limit and is prohibited.
Installation procedure
Please refer to user's manual for the detail.
Warning
Please carefully select the installation position and make sure that the final output power does not exceed the limit set force in relevant
rules. The violation of the rule could lead to serious federal penalty.
Instructions d'installation professionnelle (WAC6553D-E)
Veuillez noter que l'appareil etant dedie a une fonction unique, il doit etre utilise avec notre logiciel proprietaire de divertissement
interactif . Ce produit sera propose par un reseau de distribution controle et installe par des professionels; il ne sera pas propose au grand
public par le reseau de la grande distribution.
Installation
Ce produit est destine a un usage specifique et doit etre installe par un personnel qualifie maitrisant les radiofrequences et les regles s'y
rapportant. L'installation et les reglages ne doivent pas etre modifies par l'utilisateur final.
Emplacement d'installation
En usage normal, afin de respecter les exigences reglementaires concernant l'exposition aux radiofrequences, ce produit doit etre installe
de facon a respecter une distance de 30 cm entre l'antenne emettrice et les personnes.
Antenn externe.
Utiliser uniiquement les antennes approuvees par le fabricant. L'utilisation d'autres antennes peut conduire a un niveau de rayonnement
essentiel ou non essentiel depassant les niveaux limites definis par FCC/IC, ce qui est interdit.
Procedure d'installation
Consulter le manuel d'utilisation.
Avertissement
Choisir avec soin la position d'installation et s'assurer que la puissance de sortie ne depasse pas les limites en vigueur. La violation de
cette regle peut conduire a de serieuses penalites federales.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
220
Appendix D Legal Information
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT store things on the device.
Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and
electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the
included antenna(s).
If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.
The PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely
indoors.
This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intérieure exclusivement).
FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES)
Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all Wi-Fi product
marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only.
The following warnings apply if product is disconnect device:
• A readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the equipment; and/or
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Environment statement
ErP (Energy-related Products)
ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published
Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called
as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures,
power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
Network standby power consumption < 12W, and/or
Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or
Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.
Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail.
WEEE Directive
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment.
It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment
should be treated separately.
"INFORMAZIONI AGLI UTENTI"
Ai sensi della Direttiva 2012/19/UE del Parlamento europeo e del Consiglio, del 4 luglio 2012, sui rifiuti di apparecchiature elettriche ed
elettroniche (RAEE)
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
221
Appendix D Legal Information
Il simbolo del cassonetto barrato riportato sull’apparecchiatura o sulla sua confezione indica che il prodotto alla fine della propria vita utile
deve essere raccolto separatamente dagli altri rifiuti.
La raccolta differenziata della presente apparecchiatura giunta a fine vita e organizzata e gestita dal produttore. L’utente che vorra disfarsi
della presente apparecchiatura dovra quindi contattare il produttore e seguire il sistema che questo ha adottato per consentire la raccolta
separata dell’apparecchiatura giunta a fine vita.
L’adeguata raccolta differenziata per l’avvio successivo dell’apparecchiatura dismessa al riciclaggio, al trattamento e allo smaltimento
ambientalmente compatibile contribuisce ad evitare possibili effetti negativi sull’ambiente e sulla salute e favorisce il reimpiego e/o riciclo
dei materiali di cui e composta l’apparecchiatura.
Lo smaltimento abusivo del prodotto da parte del detentore comporta l’applicazione delle sanzioni amministrative previste dalla normativa
vigente."
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
222
Appendix D Legal Information
Environmental Product Declaration
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
223
Appendix D Legal Information
灣
以
訊息僅適用於產品銷售至
灣地
NCC Statement:
1) 用 20 cm 計算 MPE 能符合 1mW/cm2
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 (MPE) 1mW/cm2，送測產品實值為 0.320 mW/cm2 for WAC6502D-S.
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 (MPE) 1mW/cm2，送測產品實值為 0.403 mW/cm2 for WAC6502D-E.
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 (MPE) 1mW/cm2，送測產品實值為 0.744 mW/cm2 for WAC6503D-S.
2) 用 30 cm 計算 MPE 能符合 1mW/cm2
電磁波曝露量 MPE 標準值 (MPE) 1mW/cm2，送測產品實值為 0.305 mW/cm2 for WAC6553D-E.
802.11b/802.11g 警語
第
二條→經型式認證合格之低
第
四條→低
率射頻電機，非經許
率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信
，公司，商
或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率
及干擾合法通信
低
大
率或變更原設計之特性及
能
經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業
科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾
802.11a 警語
無線傳輸設備 (UNII)
在 5.25-5.35 秭赫頻帶
操作之無線資訊傳輸設備，限於室
無線資訊傳輸設備忍受合法通信之干擾且不得干擾合法通信
使用
(4.7.5)
如造成干擾，應立即停用，俟無干擾之
無線資訊傳設備的製造廠商應確保頻率穩定性，如依製造廠商使用手冊
專業安裝警語
所述正常操作，發射的信
，始得繼續使用
應維持於操作頻帶中
(4.7.6)
(4.7.7)
(WAC6553D-E)
" 本器材須經專業工程人員安裝及設定，始得設置使用，且不得直接販售給一般消費者 "
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com.
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your
vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.
To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at
support@zyxel.com.tw.
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
224
Index
Index
Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) 115
Symbols
Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 109
vs OCSP 124
certificates 108
advantages of 109
and CA 109
and FTP 145
and HTTPS 130
and SSH 142
and WWW 132
certification path 109, 117, 122
expired 109
factory-default 109
file formats 109
fingerprints 118, 123
importing 112
not used for encryption 109
revoked 109
self-signed 109, 114
serial number 117, 122
storage space 111, 120
thumbprint algorithms 110
thumbprints 110
used for authentication 109
verifying fingerprints 110
access 27
access privileges 13
access users 77
see also users 77
admin users 77
multiple logins 82
see also users 77
alerts 152, 155, 156, 158, 159, 160
AP 12
applications
MBSSID 13
Repeater 16
certification requests 114, 115
backing up configuration files 164
certifications
viewing 224
Basic Service Set
see BSS
channel 14
boot module 169
CLI 17, 31
button 31
messages 31
popup window 31
Reference Guide 2
CA
and certificates 109
commands 17
sent by Web Configurator 31
CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates
Common Event Format (CEF) 153, 158
CAPWAP 57, 59
comparison table 11
CEF (Common Event Format) 153, 158
configuration 12
information 173
BSS 13
cold start 26
Certificate Authority (CA)
see certificates
configuration files 162
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
225
Index
at restart 164
backing up 164
downloading 165
downloading with FTP 144
editing 162
how applied 163
lastgood.conf 164, 167
managing 163
startup-config.conf 167
startup-config-bad.conf 164
syntax 162
system-default.conf 167
uploading 167
uploading with FTP 144
use without restart 162
dynamic channel selection 66
e-mail
daily statistics report 150
encryption 16
RSA 117
ESSID 184
Extended Service Set IDentification 84
contact information 210
Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points
See CAPWAP
FCC interference statement 216
file extensions
configuration files 162
shell scripts 162
cookies 27
copyright 216
CPU usage 40, 42
file manager 162
current date/time 41, 126
daylight savings 127
setting manually 129
time server 129
Firefox 27
firmware
and restart 168
boot module, see boot module
current version 40, 169
getting updated 168
uploading 168, 169
uploading with FTP 144
customer support 210
flash usage 40
date 126
FTP 17, 144
and certificates 145
with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 145
daylight savings 127
DCS 66
DHCP 126
and domain name 126
diagnostics 173
Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm,
see DSA
Guide
CLI Reference 2
Quick Start 2
disclaimer 216
documentation
related 2
domain name 126
DSA 114
DTLS 57
dual radios 14
HTTP
over SSL, see HTTPS
dual-radio application 14
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
226
Index
permissions 27
redirect to HTTPS 132
vs HTTPS 131
JavaScripts 27
HTTPS 130
and certificates 130
authenticating clients 130
avoiding warning messages 134
example 132
vs HTTP 131
with Internet Explorer 132
with Netscape Navigator 133
key pairs 108
HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
Layer, see HTTPS
lastgood.conf 164, 167
layer-2 isolation 98
example 98
MAC 99
IEEE 802.1x 85
LEDs 20
Blinking 22, 24
Flashing 22, 24, 25
Off 22, 24, 25
installation 12
interface
status 41
load balancing 66
interfaces
as DHCP servers 126
log messages
categories 156, 158, 159, 160
debugging 53
regular 53
types of 53
interference 14
Internet Explorer 27
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
Internet telephony 13
logout
Web Configurator 29
IP Address 57
gateway IP address 57
logs
e-mail profiles 152
e-mailing log messages 55, 155
formats 153
log consolidation 156
settings 152
syslog servers 152
system 152
types of 152
IP subnet 57
IPv6 201
addressing 201
EUI-64 203
global address 202
interface ID 203
link-local address 201
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 201
ping 201
prefix 201
prefix length 201
stateless autoconfiguration 203
unspecified address 202
MAC address
range 40
maintenance 12
Java
Management Information Base (MIB) 146
management 12
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
227
Index
Management Mode
CAPWAP and DHCP 58
CAPWAP and IP Subnets 59
managed AP 58
standalone mode 57
packet statistics 46
pop-up windows 27
power off 26
power on 26
product registration 224
management mode 12
Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 109
managing the device
good habits 17
using FTP. See FTP.
public-private key pairs 108
MBSSID 13
memory usage 40, 43
message bar 34
messages
CLI 31
warning 34
Quick Start Guide 2
mode 12
model name 40
My Certificates, see also certificates 111
radio 14
reboot 26, 178
vs reset 178
Reference Guide, CLI 2
Netscape Navigator 27
registration
product 224
network access control 12
related documentation 2
Network Time Protocol (NTP) 128
remote management
FTP, see FTP
Telnet 144
WWW, see WWW
reports
daily 150
daily e-mail 150
objects
certificates 108
users, account
user 77
reset 187
vs reboot 178
vs shutdown 179
Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) 124
vs CRL 124
RESET button 26, 187
restart 178
operating mode 12
RF interference 14
other documentation 2
RFC
2510 (Certificate Management Protocol or
CMP) 115
overview 11
Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm
(RSA) 114
root AP 12
RSA 114, 117, 123
packet
statistics 46
RSSI threshold 89
physical ports
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
228
Index
pre-configured 13
SSID profiles 13
SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) 115
SSL 130
screen resolution 27
starting the device 26
Secure Socket Layer, see SSL
startup-config.conf 167
if errors 164
missing at restart 164
present at restart 164
serial number 40
service control
and users 130
limitations 130
timeouts 130
startup-config-bad.conf 164
station 66
statistics
daily e-mail report 150
Service Set 84
Service Set Identifier
see SSID
status 39
status bar 34
warning message popup 34
shell scripts 162
downloading 171
editing 170
how applied 163
managing 171
syntax 162
uploading 172
stopping the device 26
supported browsers 27
syslog 153, 158
syslog servers, see also logs
system log, see logs
shutdown 26, 179
vs reset 179
system name 40, 126
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) 115
system uptime 41
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
system-default.conf 167
SNMP 145, 146
agents 146
Get 146
GetNext 146
Manager 146
managers 146
MIB 146
network components 146
Set 146
Trap 146
traps 147
versions 145
Telnet 144
with SSH 142
time 126
time servers (default) 128
trademarks 216
Transport Layer Security (TLS) 145
troubleshooting 173
SSH 140
and certificates 142
client requirements 142
encryption methods 141
for secure Telnet 142
how connection is established 140
versions 141
with Linux 143
with Microsoft Windows 143
Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 119
upgrading
firmware 168
uploading
configuration files 167
firmware 168
SSID 13
SSID profile
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
229
Index
shell scripts 170
access 27
requirements 27
supported browsers 27
usage
CPU 40, 42
flash 40
memory 40, 43
onboard flash 40
web configurator 12
use 12
wireless client 66
user authentication 77
Wireless Distribution System (WDS) 16
user name
rules 78
wireless LAN 184
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 85
wireless channel 184
Wireless network
overview 65
user objects 77
users 77
access, see also access users
admin (type) 77
admin, see also admin users
and service control 130
currently logged in 41
default lease time 81, 83
default reauthentication time 82, 83
lease time 80
limited-admin (type) 77
lockout 82
reauthentication time 80
types of 77
user (type) 77
user names 78
wireless network
example 65
wireless profile 84
layer-2 isolation 84
MAC filtering 84
radio 84
security 84
SSID 84
wireless repeater 12
wireless security 13, 184
wireless station 66
WLAN interface 14
WPA2 85
WWW 131
and certificates 132
see also HTTP, HTTPS 131
Vantage Report (VRPT) 153, 158
Virtual Local Area Network 62
VLAN 62
introduction 62
VoIP 13
VRPT (Vantage Report) 153, 158
warm start 26
warning message popup 34
warranty 224
note 224
WDS 12, 16
Web Configurator 17, 27
NWA5000 / WAC6500 Series User’s Guide
230

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : ZT01651
Create Date                     : 2015:04:21 09:14:38Z
Modify Date                     : 2015:04:21 10:13:56+08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Book.book
Creator                         : ZT01651
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2015:04:21 10:13:56+08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:03bbbe2f-d72f-4af8-90af-faf9a407003e
Instance ID                     : uuid:0e0934aa-1896-464a-89df-babfa916110f
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 230

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools